Contents

Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide PDF

1 of 454
1 of 454

Summary of Content for Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide PDF

varioPRINT 135 Series

Operation guide

Copyright Copyright 2011-2014 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

2011-2014, Oc

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, copied, adapted, or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission from Oc.

Oc makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.

Furthermore, Oc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Edition 2014-11 US

Note

This Operation Guide is written for world-wide markets. As such it may contain

information relating to accessories or licensed functionality not supported by Canon

U.S.A., Inc. as of the date of the manual publication.

Contents

Chapter 1 Preface................................................................................................................................. 9

Trademarks..................................................................................................................................................... 10 Notes for the reader....................................................................................................................................... 11 Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)............................................ 12 Available User Documentation..................................................................................................................... 13

Chapter 2 Main Parts..........................................................................................................................15

Overview of the varioPRINT 135 Series Including Accessories..................................................................16 Printer Only Configuration.............................................................................................................................18 The Control Panel........................................................................................................................................... 19 The Dashboard............................................................................................................................................... 21 The Paper Modules........................................................................................................................................ 23 The Main Parts of the Scanner...................................................................................................................... 24 The Operator Attention Light........................................................................................................................ 26 The Stacker/Stapler........................................................................................................................................ 27

Chapter 3 Power Information............................................................................................................29

Power Buttons and Power Modes.................................................................................................................30 Turn On the System....................................................................................................................................... 32 Shut Down the System.................................................................................................................................. 33 Restart the System......................................................................................................................................... 34

Chapter 4 Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs............................................................................ 35

Access the Settings Editor............................................................................................................................. 36 Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel..............................................37 Introduction to the Setup Section................................................................................................................. 41 Work with the Workflow Profiles.................................................................................................................. 43 Change the System Language...................................................................................................................... 47 Change the Warning Time.............................................................................................................................48 Disable the Warning Time............................................................................................................................. 49 Truncate the Job Name................................................................................................................................. 50 Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the Control Panel........................................................................... 51

Chapter 5 Media Handling................................................................................................................. 53

Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................54 Introduction to the Media Handling....................................................................................................... 54 Introduction to the Trays

View.........................................................................56 Introduction to the Media Section.......................................................................................................... 58

Media Related Actions................................................................................................................................... 59 Open a Tray and Load Media Using the Paper Tray Button.................................................................59 Load and Assign Media Using the Trays Softkey...........................................60 Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog........................................................................................ 62 Use the Separation Enhancer................................................................................................................. 63

Contents

3 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray..............................................................................................................65 Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format..................................................................71 Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option).............................................................................................................73

Process Special Media................................................................................................................................... 75 Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the Pre-printed mode Setting................................................ 75 Process Wax Paper and Use of the Wax mode Setting........................................................................ 77 Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the Paper quality Setting................................................................. 79

Media Registration......................................................................................................................................... 81 When to Perform a Media Registration..................................................................................................81

Examples of when to Perform Media Registration.........................................................................81 How to Perform a Media Registration....................................................................................................85

Media Registration Quick Start.........................................................................................................85 Order of the Media Registration Actions.........................................................................................88 Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration.........................................................................89 Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment................................................................... 91 Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)..............95

Media registration: Troubleshooting....................................................................................................116 Registration of Preprinted Media Fails ......................................................................................... 116 Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory.............................................. 117 Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable) .................................. 118

Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions............................................................................... 119

Chapter 6 Carry Out Print Jobs....................................................................................................... 121

The Print Function........................................................................................................................................ 122 Where to Define Print Job Settings...................................................................................................... 122 Print a Job Using the Printer Driver..................................................................................................... 124 Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)........................................................................................ 125 Print a File from a USB Drive................................................................................................................ 127 Stop the Printer...................................................................................................................................... 129 Delete Print Jobs.................................................................................................................................... 131

Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel....................................................................................................132 Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel...........................132 Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing.................................................................................................... 147 Print an Urgent Job Immediately......................................................................................................... 148 Give Priority to a Print Job.................................................................................................................... 149 Print a Scheduled Job Later.................................................................................................................. 150 Reprint a Job.......................................................................................................................................... 151 Select more than One Job for Printing................................................................................................ 152 Bundle Jobs in the List of Waiting jobs............................................................................................... 153 Print a Job Ticket....................................................................................................................................155 Make a Proof...........................................................................................................................................156

Use the Schedule (Option)...........................................................................................................................157 Introduction to the Schedule View....................................................................................................... 157 Load Media via the Schedule View...................................................................................................... 160

Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel.................................................................................161 Change the Output Settings..................................................................................................................161

Change Two-Sided into One-Sided and Vice Versa..................................................................... 161 Change the Binding Edge............................................................................................................... 162 Select Another Media for a Job......................................................................................................163 Change the Settings for Covers......................................................................................................164 Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space....................................................................... 165 Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout................................. 166 Change the Print Delivery Settings................................................................................................ 167 Change the Stacking Method per Job........................................................................................... 168 Change the Print Quality Settings..................................................................................................169 Change the Finishing Method........................................................................................................ 171 Define the Finishing for Print Jobs.................................................................................................172

Change the Job Settings....................................................................................................................... 173

Contents

4 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Number of Sets........................................................................................................... 173 Check the First Set...........................................................................................................................174 Change the Page Range You Want to Print...................................................................................175 Change the Use of Separator Sheets.............................................................................................176

Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level..................................................................................... 177 Automated Workflows................................................................................................................................. 178

Introduction to Automated Workflows.................................................................................................178 Add an Automated Workflow............................................................................................................... 181 Edit an Automated Workflow................................................................................................................182 Delete an Automated Workflow............................................................................................................183 Restore the Factory Default Workflow................................................................................................. 184

Hotfolders......................................................................................................................................................185 Introduction to Hotfolders..................................................................................................................... 185 Activate the Hotfolder Function............................................................................................................ 186 Create a Hotfolder.................................................................................................................................. 187 Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation.............................................................................188 Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')........................................................................ 189

Send a job to another printer...................................................................................................................... 190 Transaction Printing (Option)...................................................................................................................... 191

Introduction to the Transaction Section ..............................................................................................191 Activate Transaction Printing................................................................................................................194 Deactivate Transaction Printing............................................................................................................195 Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode.............................................................................. 196 Transaction Setups................................................................................................................................ 197

Create a New Transaction Setup....................................................................................................197 Edit a Transaction Setup.................................................................................................................198 Activate a Transaction Setup..........................................................................................................199 Exchange All Setups Between Printers..........................................................................................200

IPDS.........................................................................................................................................................201 Media information (IPDS)............................................................................................................... 201 Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)..................................................................................202

PCL.......................................................................................................................................................... 205 Media Messages (PCL)....................................................................................................................205 Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL).................................................. 206 Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)..................................................... 207

Chapter 7 Carry Out Copy Jobs...................................................................................................... 209

The Copy Function....................................................................................................................................... 210 Introduction to the Copy Function........................................................................................................210 Scanning Information............................................................................................................................ 212 Copy or Scan Originals Using the Glass Plate.....................................................................................214 Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF................................................................................................ 216 Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job...................................................................217

Copy Your Documents................................................................................................................................. 218 Description of the Copy Job Settings...................................................................................................218 Make a Basic Copy................................................................................................................................. 235 Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 236 Copy Non-Standard Size Originals.......................................................................................................237 The Zoom Behavior............................................................................................................................... 238 Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output.............................................................................................. 240 Rename a Copy Job...............................................................................................................................241 Combining subsets into one document............................................................................................... 242 Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document....................................................................................... 243 Scan Now and Print Later......................................................................................................................245

Chapter 8 Carry Out Scan Jobs.......................................................................................................247

Configure the Scan Function....................................................................................................................... 248

Contents

5 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Introduction to the Scan Function........................................................................................................ 248 Configure the Settings for Scan to File................................................................................................ 250 Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB.............................................................................................. 251 Configure the Settings for Scan to Email.............................................................................................252 Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server........................................................................................ 253 Use the Address List File (ral.csv).........................................................................................................254 Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)........................................................................................................255

Scan Your Documents................................................................................................................................. 261 Description of the Scan Job Settings................................................................................................... 261 Scan to File............................................................................................................................................. 269 Scan to Email..........................................................................................................................................270 Scan to USB............................................................................................................................................271 Scan to DocBox...................................................................................................................................... 272 Scan to SMB........................................................................................................................................... 273 Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 274 Combine subsets into one file ............................................................................................................. 275 Optimize the Scan Quality.....................................................................................................................276

Chapter 9 Use the DocBox (Option)............................................................................................... 279

The DocBox Function................................................................................................................................... 280 Introduction to the DocBox Function................................................................................................... 280 Create a New DocBox............................................................................................................................ 282

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox...................................................................................................................... 283 Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs......................................................................... 283 Edit a Job in a DocBox...........................................................................................................................299 Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)....................................................................................... 301 Split a Combined Job in the DocBox................................................................................................... 302 Lock a Job in a DocBox......................................................................................................................... 303 Unlock a Job in a DocBox..................................................................................................................... 304 Move a Job from One DocBox to Another.......................................................................................... 305

Print the Jobs in a DocBox.......................................................................................................................... 306 Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox............................................................................................306 Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately............................................................................307 Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox................................................................................ 308

Chapter 10 Removable Hard Disk (Option)...................................................................................... 311

Introduction to the Removable Hard Disk.................................................................................................. 312 Main Parts..................................................................................................................................................... 313 Remove the Removable Hard Disk............................................................................................................. 314 Insert the Removable Hard Disk..................................................................................................................315 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 317

Chapter 11 Remote Service (ORS) (Option).....................................................................................319

Remote Service.............................................................................................................................................320

Chapter 12 Remote Monitor (Option)...............................................................................................323

Remote Monitor............................................................................................................................................324

Chapter 13 PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)...................................................................... 325

Contents

6 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 14 Counters.......................................................................................................................... 327

Introduction to the Counters....................................................................................................................... 328 Reset the Day Counters................................................................................................................................329 Print the Billing Counters Report................................................................................................................ 330

Chapter 15 Accounting...................................................................................................................... 331

General Information..................................................................................................................................... 332 Introduction to the Accounting Function............................................................................................. 332 The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor.....................................................................333 Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs.................................................................. 334

The Account ID File...................................................................................................................................... 335 The Account ID File................................................................................................................................ 335 Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File................................................................................. 336

The Account Log File....................................................................................................................................337 The Account Log File............................................................................................................................. 337 Save an Account Log File...................................................................................................................... 343

Use Accounting............................................................................................................................................ 344 Select an Accounting Mode.................................................................................................................. 344 Enter an Account ID per Job................................................................................................................. 346 Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver.............................................................................................347

Chapter 16 Add Toner and Staples...................................................................................................349

Check the Status of the Toner Reservoir.................................................................................................... 350 Add Toner..................................................................................................................................................... 351 Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges..................................................................................................353 Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit.......................................................................................355 Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit............................................................................ 357

Chapter 17 Cleaning........................................................................................................................... 359

Clean the Scanner Sensors..........................................................................................................................360 Clean the Z Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 363 Manually Start a Drum Cleaning.................................................................................................................366 Automatic Drum Cleaning........................................................................................................................... 367

Chapter 18 Printer Operation Care (POC).........................................................................................371

Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)............................................................................................ 372 Perform a Paper Path Registration..............................................................................................................374 Replace the Separation Rollers................................................................................................................... 376 Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils...............................................................................................................384 Replace the Spiral Cleaner...........................................................................................................................393 Remove Paper from the TTF........................................................................................................................402 Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger................................................................................................... 411 Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1................................................................412

Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit................................................................................................. 412 Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit...................................... 416 Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit..........................................................................................418

Chapter 19 Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................423

Solving Errors............................................................................................................................................... 424

Contents

7 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Store the logging in case of software errors..............................................................................................426

Chapter 20 Software upgrade........................................................................................................... 427

Upgrade PRISMAsync from server............................................................................................................. 428 Upgrade PRISMAsync .................................................................................................................................429 Upgrade Microsoft Windows...................................................................................................................... 430

Appendix A Specifications.................................................................................................................. 431

General.......................................................................................................................................................... 432 Environmental.............................................................................................................................................. 433 Printer Speed................................................................................................................................................ 434 Paper Modules..............................................................................................................................................435 Media Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 437 Printing, Copying and Scanning................................................................................................................. 438 PRISMAsync Controller................................................................................................................................440 Printer Driver Support..................................................................................................................................441

Index.................................................................................................................................443

Contents

8 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 1 Preface

Trademarks

List of trademarks

Oc, Oc DirectPress, varioPRINT and Oc PRISMA are registered trademarks of Oc- Technologies B.V. Oc PRISMAprepare is a trademark of Oc-Technologies B.V.

Canon is a registered trademark of Canon Inc.

Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, Acrobat Reader and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Macintosh and Safari are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

Transform is a trademark of Bottomline Technologies Inc.

Kodak and SmartBoard are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company.

Google Chrome is a trademark of Google Inc.

Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Access, Excel and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Mozilla Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.

PrintShop Mail (PSM) is a registered trademark of Objectif Lune Inc.

Xerox, DigiPath, FreeFlow and FreeFlow Makeready are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

Products in this publication are referred to by their general trade names. In most, if not all cases, these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Trademarks

10 Chapter 1 - Preface Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Notes for the reader

Introduction

This manual helps you to use the varioPRINT 135 Series. The manual contains a description of the product and guidelines to use and operate the varioPRINT 135 Series.

Definition

Attention-Getters

Parts of this manual require your special attention. These parts can provide the following: Additional general information, for example, information that is useful when you perform a

task. Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage.

Symbols used in this manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

Overview of the attention-getters

Word Icon Indicates

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay at- tention to these warnings.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and to avoid damaging the ma- chine or property.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

- Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Notes for the reader

Chapter 1 - Preface 11 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)

Generic Naming of Accessories in User Interfaces

To improve the readability of texts in User Interfaces of control panels and software, the accessories are generally referred to by their function. The table below shows the naming conventions for accessories (commercial product names and the generic terminology used in User Interfaces). Some accessories listed below may not be available in certain markets.

NOTE In some cases, there is only 1 name for more modules. The reason is that a configuration can only contain 1 of the available types of modules.

Conversion table for commercial names versus generic terminology in User Interfaces

Commercial product name: In UI, printer driver and software referred to as:

Finisher-AF1 and Finisher-AK1 [Stacker/stapler]

Saddle Finisher-AF2 and Saddle Finisher-AK2 [Stacker/stapler]

Puncher Unit-BP1/BQ1/BR1 and Puncher Unit- BT1/BU1/BS1

[Puncher]

Professional Puncher-B1 [Puncher]

Paper Folding Unit-F1 [Folder]

Document Insertion Unit-F1 [Inserter]

High Capacity Stacker-E1 [Stacker]

High Capacity Stacker-F1 [Stacker]

High Capacity Stacker-G1 [Stacker]

Booklet Trimmer-D1 [Trimmer]

Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 [Trimmer]

Perfect Binder-C1 [Perfect Binder]

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-D1 [Scanner]

Decurler Unit-A1 [Decurler]

NOTE High Capacity Stacker-E1 and High Capacity Stacker-F1 cannot be combined. High Capacity Stacker-E1 and High Capacity Stacker-G1 cannot be combined. Finisher-AF1/Saddle Finisher-AF2/Puncher Unit-BP1/BQ1/BR1 and Finisher-AK1/Saddle Finisher- AK2/Puncher Unit-BT1/BU1/BS1 cannot be combined.

Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)

12 Chapter 1 - Preface Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Available User Documentation Separate operation guides for the printer and accessories. Separate safety guides for the printer and accessories. Quick Reference Cards for basic printer actions. Online helps in printer drivers and applications.

Available User Documentation

Chapter 1 - Preface 13 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Available User Documentation

14 Chapter 1 - Preface Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 2 Main Parts

Overview of the varioPRINT 135 Series Including Accessories

Illustration

NOTE The illustration shows an example of a full varioPRINT 135 Series product line including the available accessories. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the possible configurations.

1

23

4

5

6

789101112131415

[1] Full varioPRINT 135 Series product line

Description

NOTE Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned in the table below, the figure is based on media of 80 g/m (20 lb bond).

The components of a full varioPRINT 135 Series product line

Item Component Function

1 Control panel Manage your print, copy and scan jobs. Make system settings and workflow settings. Support for troubleshooting, for example clear paper

jams.

2 External paper module (four paper trays), optional

Hold the media required to print your jobs. Total capacity: 4,600 sheets, or 7,800 sheets with the op- tional dual paper trays installed.

3 Internal paper module (four paper trays)

Hold the media required to print your jobs. Total capacity: 4,000 sheets.

4 Printer module Print the jobs. Access to the printer module is required: To clear paper jams, and To carry out Printer Operation Care (POC) actions.

5 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-D1

Scan paper originals. Copy paper originals. Perform media registrations.

Capacity: A stack of maximum 300 originals.

6 Operator attention light Make the status of the system visible from a distance.

7 Decurler Unit-A1 Fixes paper curl caused by heat etc.

8 Document Insertion Unit-F1 Hold the (pre-printed) cover sheets or insert sheets to finish your documents. 4

Overview of the varioPRINT 135 Series Including Accessories

16 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Item Component Function

9 First High Capacity Stacker- E1 or High Capacity Stack- er-F1 (not illustrated)

Receive the output. Capacity of High Capacity Stacker-E1: Output tray: 1,000 sheets. Stack trays (total): 10,000 sheets A4/LTR or 5,000

sheets A3/LGL.

Capacity of High Capacity Stacker-F1: Top tray: 200 sheets. Stack tray and eject tray (total): 6,000 sheets

A4/LTR/A3/LGL or 355 mm (14.0") in height.

NOTE High Capacity Stacker-E1 and High Capacity Stacker-F1 cannot be combined.

10 Second High Capacity Stacker-E1 or High Capaci- ty Stacker-F1 (not illustra- ted)

Add additional output capacity.

11 Perfect Binder-C1 Create perfect-bound books.

12 Paper Folding Unit-F1 Fold the output in various ways.

13 Finisher-AF1/Saddle Finish- er-AF2 or Finisher-AK1/ Saddle Finisher-AK2

Staple and stack the output. Optional, the stacker/stapler can be equipped with a Puncher Unit-Bx1 to punch the output.

14 Booklet Trimmer-D1 Trim the fore-edge of each booklet.

15 Two-Knife Booklet Trim- mer-A1

Trim the top and bottom of each booklet.

Overview of the varioPRINT 135 Series Including Accessories

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 17 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printer Only Configuration

Introduction

Next to the configurations mentioned in section Overview of the varioPRINT 135 Series Including Accessories on page 16, the varioPRINT 135 Series also has a printer only version. The printer only version cannot copy and scan.

The printer only configuration is a varioPRINT 135 Series product that doesn't have an ADF. Instead of the ADF the varioPRINT 135 Series product has a cover. The glass plate and the corresponding scanner are still present. You can use the glass plate for service purposes and for media registration. You perform the media registration on a printer only configuration in the same way as on a configuration with an ADF.

The copy and scan mode are not available on the control panel, which disables the use of the scanner to carry out copy and scan jobs.

Printer Only Configuration

18 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Control Panel

Introduction

The control panel helps you to carry out print jobs, copy jobs and scan jobs. This section describes the main components of the control panel.

1

10

2

3

4

5 7 8

9

6

[2] The control panel

The main components of the control panel

The main components of the control panel

Component Function

1 Sleep button Put the system into the sleep mode or wake up the system.

2 Stop button Stop the printing process after a set or as soon as possible.

3 Paper tray button Get immediate access to the [Trays] section on the control panel to do the following (for example): Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray. Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays. Open the front door of the printer.

4 USB port Insert a USB drive into the USB port to: Print any documents on the USB drive, or Scan paper originals to the USB drive

5 [Schedule] button (optional) Access the [Schedule] view to manage the jobs in the schedule.

6 [Jobs] button Manage and print the jobs in the lists of [Waiting jobs], [Scheduled jobs] and [Printed jobs], or in a DocBox (optional). 4

The Control Panel

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 19 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Component Function

7 [Trays] button Access the [Trays] section on the control panel to do the following, for example: Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray, or Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays.

8 [System] button Access the [System] section to do the following, for example: Check the status of the toner, staples and other

supplies. Read counters. Start maintenance. Set up the preferred workflows. Change a number of default system settings such

as the language. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD

panel. Shut down the printer. View the content of the media catalogue or add

temporary media to the media catalogue.

9 Dashboard The dashboard displays information about the sys- tem status such as: Information about the current printing process. Information about operator intervention that is

required soon. Information about errors. Information about the status of the toner reser-

voir and staple cartridges.

10 Status LED The status LED displays the status of the system: Red LED

The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange LED The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is required. Operator attention is re- quired soon. The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warning time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning time in the [System] view of the control panel.

Green LED The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the set warning time. Operator attention is not required.

LED off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing and no operator attention is required.

The Control Panel

20 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Dashboard

Introduction

The dashboard is the upper part of the control panel. The dashboard is always visible, irrespective of the current view. The dashboard shows the following. The status of the system. The status of the supplies. The status of the finishers. The current process. Instructions for the operator. The [Resume] button after you stopped the printer.

Illustration

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is green. No action is required.

321 4

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is orange. Next to the status bar, the dashboard displays a message that indicates which action is required soon.

321 4

The Parts of the Dashboard

The dashboard

Number Function

1 Display the status of the machine, for example [Initializing...], [Printing...] or [Printing will stop...]. Each status message can have a sub-message with addi- tional information.

2 Display the file name of the current job (for document printing) or current stream (for stream printing). Furthermore, the progress of the current job is displayed. For document printing, the counter can display the following information. Set X of Y Sheet X of Y or Sheet X.

X represents the current status of the print job. Y represents the total number of sets or sheets of a print job. When the sorting method for a job is set to [By set] the dashboard displays the set count (Set X of Y). If the sorting method for a job is set to [By page], or when you print stream jobs, the dashboard only displays a sheet count. 4

The Dashboard

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 21 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Number Function

3 Display the action that you must do now or soon. The colors of the vertical status bar at the left-hand side match the colors of the LED on the control panel and the operator attention light. When the color is orange or red, a message indicates the required action. Orange means that action is required soon. How long before an upcoming action the control panel starts to display the message depends on the defined warning time. Red means that action is required now.

4 Display that maintenance is required soon or immediately Display the status of the finishers. Display the status of the staple cartridges. Display the status of the toner reservoir.

NOTE The dashboard can only display one message at a time. When there are more messages, the dashboard displays the first required or most important message. The dashboard indicates that there are more messages. Touch this message to display all other messages.

The Dashboard

22 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Paper Modules

Internal Paper Module

NOTE Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned below, the figure is based on media of 80 g/m (20 lb bond).

The varioPRINT 135 Series contains four integrated, internal paper trays. Two bulk trays with a capacity of 1,500 sheets each. Two multi-size trays with a capacity of 500 sheets each.

The bulk trays support A4, LTR and JIS B5 only. When a bulk tray is configured for one of these media sizes, you can only load media with that size. To switch to another media size, you must manually adjust the size of the bulk trays before you can load that other media size.

External Paper Module

You can extend the system with an optional external paper module. This paper module contains four paper trays. Two bulk trays with a capacity of 1,700 sheets each (or 3,300 A4/LTR sheets each when the

optional dual paper trays are installed) Two standard trays with a capacity of 600 sheets each.

Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the dual paper trays.

The Paper Modules

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 23 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Main Parts of the Scanner

Introduction

Place your originals on the glass plate or into the automatic document feeder (ADF), depending on the size and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use. Both sides of two- sided originals can be scanned simultaneously. The table below describes the glass plate and the ADF.

Overview of the feeding possibilities

Component Function

Glass plate Place the originals on the glass plate to copy bound orig- inals (such as books and magazines), heavyweight or lightweight originals, and transparencies.

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Place the originals into the ADF when you want to copy several originals at the same time. The originals are au- tomatically fed to the glass plate and scanned. Two-si- ded originals can also be scanned as two-sided docu- ments. The ADF has a capacity of 300 sheets (80 g/m or 20 lb bond).

CAUTION Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the originals tray, because your fingers may get caught.

IMPORTANT Be careful not to drop objects such as paper clips into the gaps because this can cause damage to the machine.

NOTE If the original document consists of more than 300 sheets (based on 80 g/m or 20 lb bond

media), you must split the original document into smaller partial sets (subsets). Then you must use the [Combined copy job] function to scan the subsets individually and create one document containing all the subsets.

If the glass plate is dirty, the print quality may deteriorate. In this case, clean the feeding belt and the glass plate.

Blocking the original output area can result in damaging originals, and printing may not take place correctly. Therefore, do not place objects into the original output area.

The Main Parts of the Scanner

24 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[3] Main parts of the scanner

Parts and their Function

Main parts of the scanner

Component Function

1 ADF cover Open this cover to clear a paper jam.

2 Originals indicator Lights when originals are placed in the originals tray of the scanner.

3 Originals tray Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet into the ADF. Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.

4 Auxiliary originals tray Pull out this tray when you want to feed large originals.

5 Auxiliary originals receiving tray The originals output tray receives the scanned originals. Pull out the auxiliary tray before you scan large originals.

6 Originals output tray Receive the scanned originals.

7 Paper guides Adjust the paper guides to match the width of the original.

8 Document feed scanning area Scan documents sent from the ADF.

9 Glass plate Use the glass plate to scan special origi- nals such as books, heavyweight origi- nals, lightweight originals and transpar- encies.

NOTE When you use the glass plate to copy or scan heavyweight origi- nals, such as books or maga- zines, do not press down hard on the ADF.

10 Inner cover Open this cover to clean the document feed scanning area.

The Main Parts of the Scanner

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 25 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Operator Attention Light

Introduction

The operator attention light on top of the printer helps you to monitor the status of the printer from a distance. The colors of the lights match the printer status that the dashboard displays.

Illustration

[4] The operator attention light

Status Colors

The status colors of the operator attention light

Color Description

Red The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is required. Operator attention is required soon. The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warn- ing time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning time in the [System] section of the operator panel. By factory default, the warning time is set to 10 minutes. So 10 mi- nutes before operator attention is required, the orange light will il- luminate.

Green The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the set warning time. Operator attention is not required.

All lights off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing.

The Operator Attention Light

26 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Stacker/Stapler

Introduction

The stacker/stapler (either Finisher-AF1 or Finisher-AK1) can stack and staple your prints. When the Saddle Finisher (either Saddle Finisher-AF1 or Saddle Finisher-AK2) is available, you can also create half-folded, saddle-stitched booklets. Furthermore, an optional Puncher Unit can be integrated in the stacker/stapler to punch the prints.

NOTE See the Operation guide of Finisher-AF1/Saddle Finisher-AF2/Puncher Unit-BP1/BQ1/BR1, or Finisher-AK1/Saddle Finisher-AK2/Puncher Unit-BT1/BU1 for detailed information about the stacker/stapler.

External View

1

2 2

3 3

7

6

7

6

5

4

[5] The main parts of Saddle Finisher-AK2 and Finisher-AK1

Main parts

Component Function

1 Main power switch Put the switch on "I" to turn on the stack- er/stapler.

2 Top cover Open the top cover to clear a paper jam inside the unit.

3 Front door Open the front door to replace the staple cartridge, remove jammed paper, or clear a staple jam in the stacker/stapler, in the stapler unit or in the saddle stitch unit.

4 Booklet tray (Saddle Finisher- AF2/AK2 only)

Receive saddle stitched booklets.

5 Auxiliary booklet tray (Saddle Finish- er-AF2/AK2 only)

Pull out the auxiliary booklet tray to re- ceive large size booklets. 4

The Stacker/Stapler

Chapter 2 - Main Parts 27 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Component Function

6 Lower tray Receive finished documents.

7 Upper tray Receive finished documents.

Internal View

[6] The waste trays

Main parts

Component Function

1 Puncher waste tray Pull out the puncher waste tray to remove punch waste.

2 Stapler waste tray Pull out the stapler waste tray to discard the staple waste.

The Stacker/Stapler

28 Chapter 2 - Main Parts Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 3 Power Information

Power Buttons and Power Modes

The Power Buttons

The printer has the following switches and buttons to control the power supply.

Button Name Description

On/Off button The On/Off button is located on top of the printer. Using the On/Off button starts up or shuts down the whole sys- tem, including the PRISMAsync controller.

Sleep button The Sleep button is located at the right-hand side of the control panel. Using the Sleep button puts the printer in- to sleep mode or wakes the printer up from the sleep mode. When you press the Sleep button, the control panel will be turned off too. The PRISMAsync controller remains on. The Sleep button allows you to switch between the Ready mode and the Sleep mode. This is only possible when the On/Off button is On and the start-up phase is completed.

The Power Modes

You can find the energy saving settings in the Settings Editor under [Preferences] -> [System settings] -> [Energy save modes].

The power modes

Power mode Control panel Description

Off Off The printer and the controller are completely off. There is no power consumption. The printer cannot receive or print any job.

Ready On The printer is ready to print jobs.

Low power mode Off The low power mode is an energy save mode. To use the low power mode, the [Low power mode tim- er enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes]. When this setting is disabled, the printer skips the low power mode and goes into the sleep mode or deep sleep mode after the time set for these modes. When the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Low power mode timer] setting, the printer goes in- to low power mode automatically. Possible values: 5 - 30 minutes. Factory default: 20 minutes. The printer wakes up when a job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs] or when you touch the control panel (either the screen or any button). 4

Power Buttons and Power Modes

30 Chapter 3 - Power Information Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Power mode Control panel Description

Sleep mode Off Once the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Sleep mode timer] setting in the Settings Editor, the printer goes into sleep mode automatically. Compared to the low power mode, the printer uses less energy. Possible values: 31 - 240 minutes. Factory default: 40 minutes. The printer wakes up when: You press the Sleep button on the control panel, or A wake-up timer expires, or A job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs], provided

that the [Automatic wake-up enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes].

Press the Sleep button on the right-hand side of the control panel to put the printer into the sleep mode man- ually. The printer goes into the sleep mode after all jobs are finished. When the [Deep sleep mode enabled] setting is set to [Yes], the printer goes into the deep sleep mode.

Deep sleep mode Off The deep sleep mode is an alternative to the sleep mode described above. To use the deep sleep mode, the [Deep sleep mode enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes]. In the deep sleep mode: The printer uses less energy than in sleep mode. The printer needs more time to wake up than in sleep

mode.

NOTE An application in your workflow may require the printer to wake up more quickly. If the printer does not wake up quick enough, the application may give an error. In that case it is advised to disable the deep sleep mode. Then the printer will use the sleep mode instead.

Power Buttons and Power Modes

Chapter 3 - Power Information 31 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Turn On the System

Illustration

[7] The On/Off button

Procedure

NOTE This procedure applies to a system that is completely off.

1. Put the On/Off button of each connected finishing unit into the "I" position. 2. Press the On/Off button on top of the printer, next to the base of the control panel.

Turn On the System

32 Chapter 3 - Power Information Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Shut Down the System

Illustration

[8] Shut down the system

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system]. The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down?].

2. Press [Yes]. A message indicates when the shut down will begin. When the shut down is complete, the control panel will be off.

3. To shut down the system completely, switch the On/Off button of each connected finishing unit into the "O" position.

Shut Down the System

Chapter 3 - Power Information 33 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Restart the System

Introduction

You can restart the system via the Settings Editor (under [Support] -> [Troubleshooting]) or via the control panel.

Illustration

[9] Restart the system

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system]. The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down?].

2. Press [Restart].

Restart the System

34 Chapter 3 - Power Information Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 4 Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs

Access the Settings Editor

Introduction

The Settings Editor is a web-based application and therefore accessible via an Internet browser. The Settings Editor enables you to manage settings or to display information in the following areas. [Media] [Preferences] [Workflow] [Configuration] [Support] [Transaction printing] (optional)

Before you begin

Make sure you have the following information. The IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller. The key operator password to change all settings except for the settings in the [Configuration]

tab. The system administrator password to change all settings including the settings in the

[Configuration] tab.

Procedure

1. Open your web browser.

NOTE When the Settings Editor does not display the correct language, you can change the preferred language in the Internet options of your Internet browser. The desired language must be first in the list of languages.

2. In the address bar, enter the IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller. http:// https:// The Settings Editor application appears.

You can now make the required changes.

Access the Settings Editor

36 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel

Introduction

NOTE The information contained in this section is primarily intended for key operators and system administrators.

The Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller is a web based application that allows key operators and system administrators to adapt the system completely to the situation in an organization and production environment. The Settings Editor allows key operators and system administrators to manage settings with regard to network configuration, system preferences, job preferences and media, for example.

For convenience reasons, a subset of frequently used settings is accessible through the control panel.

Settings available via the control panel

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[About] [Serial number] (read-only)

[Version of printer software] (read-on- ly)

The [About] section allows you to look up the serial number and software version of the printer.

[Software updates] [Download auto- matically]

[Upgrade software (from USB)]

[Upgrade software (from server)]

[PRISMAsync downgrade]

[Install Windows update]

[Uninstall Windows update]

You can upgrade the printer software and the Microsoft Windows software through this section. You can downgrade patches through this section. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you upgrade or down- grade the software. When you enable [Download automatically] an update is downloaded automatically, when available via ORS. You only have to install the update. From release 3.3 onwards, you can select the setting to keep existing jobs on the system when you upgrade the software from USB. From release 3.3 onwards, the jobs on the sys- tem are not deleted after you upgraded the software from server.

[Software licenses] [Upload license] When you have a new license to activate a new feature on the printer, you can upload the license through this section. After uploading the license, the feature becomes active. You can only use this section after you inser- ted an USB drive in an USB port on the control panel. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you upload the license. 4

Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 37 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[Logging] [Save the data- dump file]

[Save the trace file] [Print the configura-

tion report]

When an error occurs, the help desk of your printer supplier can ask you to create and send a datadump file. The datadump file is a .zip file that contains detailed technical information about your system. Furthermore, the system can store trace log files in .zip files. You can save both .zip files to a network location or to a USB drive. The configuration report contains information about the configuration of your printing sys- tem, for example information about the sys- tem configuration, controller configuration or network settings. You can print the configura- tion report for backup purposes, for example. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you save a file or print a report.

[Connectivity] [MAC address] (read-only)

[Host name] [Link speed and

connection type] IPv4 settings IPv6 settings DNS settings WINS settings [Test the TCP/IP

connection]

The [Connectivity] section contains the main settings to integrate the printer into a network. After you have adapted the network settings, you can test the connection from here. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you adapt the network settings.

[Remote connection] (optional)

[Remote connection status] (read-only)

[Remote connection enabled]

[Remote Service country code]

[Test Remote con- nection]

The [Remote connection] section (optional) contains the settings to enable the remote con- nection and to configure the Remote Service.

NOTE Only Service can adapt the remote connection settings. After Service adapts the remote connection set- tings, you can test the remote con- nection with this setting. 4

Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel

38 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[System settings] [Date and time] [System of meas-

urement] [Time zone] [Update finisher

configuration] [Bulk tray 1 media

size] [Bulk tray 2 media

size]

The [System settings] section contains settings to change the date and time of the system, or the system of measurement used. When you change the system of measurement, all corre- sponding values on the system will be changed. For example, when you change [Met- ric] into [Imperial], all values will be displayed in inches. Furthermore, when a new finisher was added to your configuration, you can use the [Update finisher configuration] function to tell the sys- tem that your configuration was updated. Then the finisher will be added to the output loca- tions in the job parameters section, for exam- ple. From the [System settings] you can also indi- cate the media in the bulk trays one and two.

NOTE A5 and Statement are only valid if the bulk tray for small format is in- stalled and configured by the service technician. If you select A5 or State- ment and the bulk tray for small for- mat is not installed, you are not able to assign media to the bulk tray.

[10] Change settings via the control panel

Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 39 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Procedure

NOTE The key operator PIN or the system administrator password is required to make changes in this section.

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Local key operator settings] (under [Advanced]).

2. Touch the button of the group that contains the setting you want to change or view. 3. Touch the required setting. 4. Look up the required information or make the required changes. 5. When you make a change, touch [OK] to confirm. 6. Press [Close].

Change a Number of Settings in the Settings Editor via the Control Panel

40 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Introduction to the [Setup] Section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system information, the system setup and media information.

This section gives an overview of the [Setup] section in the [System] view.

Overview of the [Setup] Section

[11] Overview of the [Setup] section

The Items of the [Setup] Section

Description of the [Setup] section

Num ber

Item Description

1 Summary of the defined workflow settings

Display the main settings of the current workflow profile.

2 [Workflow profile] Select a workflow profile or manually define the settings that match your needs.

3 [Language] Change the language of the system.

4 [Warning time] Define the moment when the system warns you about an action that is required soon, for example 10 minutes in advance. The warning is displayed in the dashboard and indicated through the operator attention light.

5 [Job name truncation] Define the way the system shortens the job name when the job name is too long to display fully. 4

Introduction to the [Setup] Section

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 41 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Num ber

Item Description

6 [Operator panel settings] Adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen of the control panel.

7 [Shut down system] Shut down the printer and the controller in a controlled way.

8 [Advanced media settings] Enable or disable the [Pre-printed mode]. Enable or disable the [Wax mode]. Set the paper quality factor to [Normal], [Low] or

[Lower].

9 [Intermediate check print] Print a test sheet of a running job to check the quality.

10 [Accounting] Define the [Accounting mode] and the [Account ID]. The [Accounting mode] is only available when the [Identifica- tion enabled] setting in the Settings Editor on the PRIS- MAsync controller is set to [Yes].

11 [Local key operator set- tings]

Get direct access to a number of important key operator settings in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync con- troller.

Introduction to the [Setup] Section

42 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Work with the Workflow Profiles

Introduction

The machine is used in different printing environments. Each environment requires other settings to optimize the workflow or to meet your personal workflow preferences. The machine contains a number of default workflow profiles to help you optimize your workflow. The default workflow profiles are combinations of frequently used settings for print jobs ([Receive], [Print] and [Output]). However, the workflow profiles cannot cover all the possible workflows you may need. Therefore, you can also define the settings individually (custom workflow).

This section makes recommendations about when to use which workflow profile. Furthermore, this section describes the settings and the effects of the settings.

NOTE The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the button displays the text [Custom].

NOTE The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the button displays the text [Custom].

The Workflow Profiles

[12] The workflow profiles screen

The Use of the Default Workflow Profiles

The following table makes recommendations about when to use which default workflow profile.

Work with the Workflow Profiles

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 43 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

When to use which workflow

Profile When to use

[Standard] You need a productive workflow but you still want to have sufficient control over the jobs.

[Job by job] You want to start the jobs one by one. Each time a job has been prin- ted, the machine goes on hold. Always touch [Resume] in the dash- board to start the next job.

[Check and print] You want to check the quality and layout of each first set of a job be- fore the remaining sets will be printed.

[Manual planning] The jobs are sent to the machine in a random order. You can manually define the most productive order in which the machine will print the jobs.

[Unattended] You want to continue printing while you are absent, for example after working hours. Then the machine will print the scheduled jobs, provi- ded that all the required media, supplies and output locations are avail- able.

The Default Settings for [Receive]

The default [Receive] settings

Workflow profile [Receive] settings

[Destination of print job]

[Destination of copy job]

[Destination of Doc Box job]

[Standard] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Job by job] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Check and print] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Manual planning] [Waiting jobs] [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Unattended] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

The Default Settings for [Print]

The default [Print] settings

Workflow profile [Print] settings

[Confirm start of job] [Check first set]

[Standard] [Off] [As in job]

[Job by job] [On] [As in job]

[Check and print] [Off] [On]

[Manual planning] [Off] [As in job]

[Unattended] [Off] [Off]

Work with the Workflow Profiles

44 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Default Settings for [Output]

The default [Output] settings

Workflow profile [Output] settings

[Next output tray] [Offset stacking]

[Standard] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]

[Job by job] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]

[Check and print] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]

[Manual planning] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]

[Unattended] [When tray is full] [Banners]

Values and effects of the settings

The following table describes the effects of the various values of the settings.

Values and effects of the settings

Setting Values Effect

[Destination of print job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[As in job] The jobs are sent to the destination that is defined in the job ticket or in the copy job.

[Destination of copy job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[DocBox] The copy jobs go directly to the [DocBox]. When you have more than 1 [DocBox] on your system, you can se- lect the [DocBox] to which the jobs will be sent.

[Destination of DocBox job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[Confirm start of job]

[On] The machine always stops before the next scheduled job. Touch [Resume] in the dashboard to start each job.

[Off] The machine keeps printing all the jobs. The machine does not stop before the next scheduled job, unless there is a reason to stop. For example when a media is not available. 4

Work with the Workflow Profiles

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 45 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Effect

[Check first set] [On] The machine goes on hold after the first set of a job is printed. You can check the quality and layout of the first set before the machine prints the remaining sets.

[Off] The machine will print the whole job without stopping after the first set.

[As in job] The machine will print the jobs as indicated in the job ticket.

[Next output tray] [After each job] Each job is sent to the next available output tray. In this context, the second stack of the stacker is also defined as an output tray.

[When tray is full] All the jobs are stacked until an output tray is full. When an output tray is full, the next jobs are sent to the next output tray.

[Offset stacking] [Jobs] Each printed job that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous printed job with an offset. This helps you to identify the various jobs.

[Sets (always)] Each printed set that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous set with an offset. This helps you to identify the various sets.

[Sets (as in job)] Each printed set is delivered to the output location as de- fined in the job ticket or copy job. Therefore, the sets can be stacked in one straight line or with an offset.

[Banners] Each banner page of a job is delivered to the output lo- cation with an offset. This helps you to identify the sepa- rate jobs. The jobs themselves are stacked in one straight line.

[Off] All the printed jobs or sets are stacked in one straight line. There is no offset between the jobs or sets.

Work with the Workflow Profiles

46 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the System Language

Illustration

[13] Overview of the available languages

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Language]. 2. Touch the desired language. 3. Press [OK].

Change the System Language

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 47 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Warning Time

Introduction

When operator interaction is required immediately or soon, the LED on the operator panel and the operator attention light can warn you. This is a trigger that action is required immediately of soon., for example load a required media type or empty an output location. You can define how long in advance the warning message is displayed.

By factory default, the function [Warning in advance] is enabled and set to 10 minutes. Then the dashboard starts to display the warning 10 minutes before an action becomes inevitable. If you do not respond to the warning message, the printer will stop. Depending on the urgency of the warning message, the LED on the operator panel and the operator attention light are orange or red.

NOTE You can only change the warning time when the [Warning in advance] function is enabled.

Illustration

[14] Change the warning time

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time]. 2. Touch the - or + button to decrease or increase the warning time in steps of one minute. You can

set a time from 1 - 60 minutes. 3. Press [OK].

Change the Warning Time

48 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Disable the Warning Time

Introduction

When operator interaction is required now or soon, the dashboard and the operator attention light warn you. However, you can disable this warning function.

[15] Disable the warning time

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time] (under [Operator panel]). When the box for [Warning in advance] has a check mark and states [On], the function is enabled.

2. Touch the [Warning in advance] button. The check mark disappears. The status [On] changes into [Off].

3. Press [OK].

Disable the Warning Time

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 49 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Truncate the Job Name

Introduction

In the [Jobs] view, the control panel displays all jobs with their job names. If a job name is too long, the systems truncates the job name. To enable you to identify your jobs in the lists more easily, you can define how the system truncates the job names. This allows you to keep the identifying part of the job name. You can truncate the job name either at the beginning or at the end of the name.

Illustration

[16] Job name truncation

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Job name truncation] (under [Operator panel]).

2. For [Truncate job name at], select [Beginning] or [End]. 3. Touch the - or + button to indicate the number of characters before truncation. 4. Press [OK].

Truncate the Job Name

50 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the Control Panel

Introduction

You can adjust the brightness and contrast of your monitor to improve the readability of the control panel. The required brightness and contrast settings can depend on the lighting in your room, for example.

Setting Description

[Auto adjust] The screen of the control panel will automatically set the correct ratio of brightness and contrast.

[Brightness] You can increase or decrease the brightness from level 20 to 100 in steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the brightness.

[Contrast] You can increase or decrease the contrast from level 10 to 100 in steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the contrast.

Illustration

[17] Adjust brightness and contrast

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Operator panel settings]. 2. Touch [Auto adjust] to optimize the brightness and contrast of the screen automatically. 3. Touch [OK] when the brightness and contrast are OK, or continue with the steps below when

these settings are not yet OK. 4. Touch '-' to decrease or '+' to increase the [Brightness]. 5. Touch '-' to decrease or '+' to increase the [Contrast]. 6. Press [OK].

Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the Control Panel

Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs 51 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the Control Panel

52 Chapter 4 - Adapt Printer Settings to Your Needs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 5 Media Handling

Introduction

Introduction to the Media Handling

Media Handling

During printing, the printer can draw sheets from any tray that contains the required media for that sheet in the job. You can open any tray while the system is running to add paper. The tray opens as soon as possible without causing a paper jam. If the required media is available in other trays, printing continues. Otherwise, printing stops.

Reload behavior

If you open and close a tray, and the slider position in the tray is consistent with the media type previously configured for that tray, then the system assumes that the media type has not changed. Otherwise, the system prompts you to assign a new media type to the tray.

Media assignment through the control panel

The control panel enables you to assign a specific media type to a tray at any time. You can select the media to be assigned from the media catalogue and from the temporary media types. When the print jobs require media that are not included in the media catalogue, these media become temporary media on the system.

Supported media types per paper tray

All paper trays, except the internal bulk trays one and two, can be configured as desired.

The internal bulk trays one and two only support A4, LTR and B5. There is no sensor on these trays that can detect the configuration. When you open and close these bulk trays, the assumption is that the size is not changed. To load a different media size, the bulk trays must be adjusted first.

What is the Media Catalog

The media catalogue is a list of predefined media and media attributes which you can define in the Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller.

When you use the media catalog, the control panel, the printer drivers and other applications all display the same list of predefined media. The control panel and the printer driver automatically retrieve and display the latest version of the media catalog.

What are Temporary Media

You can also use many other media that are not included in the media catalog. These media become temporary media. You can look up the currently used temporary media in the [Media] section of the [System] view. Furthermore, you can assign the temporary media to a paper tray.

The temporary media remain available on the system until: No more waiting jobs need this media type No more scheduled jobs need this media type No more printed jobs need this media type No more DocBox jobs need this media type This media type is no longer available in the paper trays.

When you plan to use these media more often, you can add these temporary media to the media catalog.

Introduction

54 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Introduction to the Media Handling

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 55 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Introduction to the [Trays] View

Introduction

The [Trays] view has the following functions. Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays Open the paper trays and assign the media to paper trays Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray.

The Items of the [Trays] View

1

2 3 4 5 6

[18] Example of a configuration with 1 external paper module

Num ber

Item Function

1 Content of the paper trays Indicate the current content and filling level of the paper trays. The [Trays] view displays the parameters of the media that are currently in the paper trays. The parame- ters are a combination of icons and texts.

2 [Assign] button Assign media from the media catalogue.

3 [Unassign] button Unassign media from the paper tray.

4 [Open] button Open the selected paper tray to load the media.

5 [Registration] button Perform a media registration on the selected media.

6 Arrow buttons When your configuration contains more paper modules than the [Trays] view can display in one screen, you can touch the arrow buttons to change the part of the ma- chine displayed.

Introduction to the [Trays] View

56 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The paper tray information

The [Trays] view displays the following textual information for each paper tray. The media name, for example 'Normal paper'. The media size, for example A4 or LTR. The media weight, for example 80 g/m or 20 lb bond. The media color The special characteristics of the media, for example [cyclic] or [punched]. In brackets,

additional information is given about these media, for example the cycle count or the number of holes for punched media.

The [Trays] view displays the following icons for each paper tray.

The meaning of the icons

Icon Description

The paper tray is empty.

The paper tray is full.

NOTE Each line indicates the presence of about 100 sheets.

The paper tray is too full. Remove sheets from the stack.

The plate inside the paper tray is down.

The paper tray is open.

The paper guides inside the paper tray do not match the selected me- dia size. You must correct the paper guides or the selected media.

or

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge or short edge . The small icons indicate A4/LTR or A4/LTR-like media. The large icons indicate A3/Tabloid or A3/Tabloid-like media. When you defined a color for a media, the icon can have that color.

The paper tray is in use for one or more scheduled jobs.

The paper tray contains tab sheets.

The paper tray contains tab sheets that must be processed as inserts.

The paper tray contains inserts.

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge.

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the short edge.

Introduction to the [Trays] View

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 57 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Introduction to the [Media] Section

Introduction

This section gives an overview of the [Media] section in the [System] view.

Overview of the [Media] Section

[19] Overview of the [Media] section

The Items of the [Media] Section

Description of the [Media] section

Item Function

1 [Registration] button Touch the [Registration] button after selecting a media from the media catalog to start a registration procedure for that media.

2 [To catalog] button Touch the [To catalog] button after selecting a tempora- ry media to add that media to the media catalogue.

3 List of all the media that are available in the media catalog.

The list displays the current content of the media cata- log.

4 List of temporary media The list displays the temporary media that are currently available on the system.

Introduction to the [Media] Section

58 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Related Actions

Open a Tray and Load Media Using the Paper Tray Button

Introduction

Besides loading media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule] view, there are two ways to open a tray and to load and assign media: 1. Through the softkey for the [Trays] view at the bottom of the control panel. 2. Through the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.

In both cases, the control panel displays an overview of the printer and the paper trays. Now you can open a tray, and load and assign media.

This section describes the use of the paper tray button .

IMPORTANT Make sure that you remove the packaging carefully from the paper because glue stains on the paper can pollute the machine. To prevent pollution, it is advised to remove the first and the last sheet of a pack of paper. In case of pollution of the machine, you must carry out the drum cleaning procedure via the Maintenance section on the control panel.

NOTE You only have to assign the media to a paper tray when you change the media type for that paper tray. For example, when the paper tray previously contained Normal A4 and you load Coated A4 now. Then you have to assign Coated A4 to that paper tray.

NOTE You can order all required supplies from your local authorized dealer.

Procedure

1. Press the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch the tray in which you want to load the media. 3. Touch [Open] to open the selected tray. 4. Load the media into the tray (header up, face up). 5. When you loaded a different media type than the media previously contained in the selected

paper tray, touch [Assign media]. 6. Select the correct media type from the media catalogue. 7. Press [OK]. 8. Press [Done]. 9. Close the paper tray gently by pushing in the middle of the tray cover.

Media Related Actions

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 59 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey

Introduction

Besides loading media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule] view, there are two ways to open a tray and to load and assign media: 1. Through the softkey for the [Trays] view at the bottom of the control panel. 2. Through the tray hardkey at the right-hand side of the control panel.

In both cases, the control panel displays an overview of the printer and the paper trays. Now you can open a tray, and load and assign media.

This section describes the use of the softkey for the [Trays] view.

IMPORTANT Make sure that you remove the packaging carefully from the paper because glue stains on the paper can pollute the machine. In case of pollution of the machine, you must carry out the drum cleaning procedure via the Maintenance section on the control panel.

NOTE You only have to assign the media to a paper tray when you change the media type for that paper tray. For example, when the paper tray previously contained Normal A4 and you load Coated A4 now. Then you have to assign Coated A4 to that paper tray.

NOTE You can order all required supplies at your local authorized dealer.

Illustration

[20] Load and assign media using the [Trays] softkey

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Trays]. 2. Touch the paper tray where you want to put the media. 3. Press [Open].

Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey

60 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

4. Load the new media. 5. Close the paper tray gently by pushing in the middle of the tray cover. 6. Press [Assign].

A list of media from the Media catalogue appears. The list displays all the media in the Media catalogue that match the position of the paper guides inside the closed paper tray. When the list is empty, the media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides.

7. Touch the new media type. 8. Press [OK].

Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 61 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog

Introduction

When a job is submitted that requires media that are not included in the media catalog, these media become temporary media. The control panel displays the temporary media in the following places. In the list of [Required media] in the [Schedule] view, when the job is scheduled for printing. In the list of [Temporary media] in the [Media] tab of the [System] view.

When you plan to use a temporary media more often, you can add the media to the media catalog.

This section describes how to add temporary media to the media catalog.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media]. The names of the temporary media are displayed in the [Temporary media] section.

2. Select the media you want to add to the media catalog. 3. Press [To catalog].

The media is added to the media catalog.

NOTE If required, you can edit the attributes of the media in the media catalog, that is part of the Settings Editor.

Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog

62 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the Separation Enhancer

Introduction

The separation enhancer improves the separation performance of specific media, such as coated media. The table below gives recommendations about the use of the separation enhancer.

To prevent the risk of double sheet separations, it is advised to remove the separation enhancer in all other situations.

The trays three and four both contain a separation enhancer. You can use the separation enhancer in all the trays.

When to use the separation enhancer

Media formats Coated media types All other media types

Small formats: A4, LTR, 16K, B5, US Standard > 100 g/m (28 lb bond)

Never

Large formats: (A3, SRA3, A3+, 8K, B4, Legal) Always > 160 g/m (60 lb cov- er)

NOTE Only deviate from the recommendations above when the printer repeatedly stops while the operator panel displays the error code ORE147x1.

Illustration

[21] The separation enhancer

Install the separation enhancer

Step Action Remarks

1 Touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> [Separation enhancer] -> [Start]. 4

Use the Separation Enhancer

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 63 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Remarks

2 [Open the tray (tray 3 or 4) and loosen the separation enhancer.] [Place the separation enhancer in the sep- aration unit.]

3 [Lock the separation enhancer.]

Use the Separation Enhancer

64 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

Introduction

The bulk trays are designed to contain the media that you frequently use a lot. Therefore, the paper guides inside the bulk trays are set to a fixed media size.

However, if you want to use a different media size with a bulk tray, you must do the following. Reposition the paper guides of the bulk tray manually to match the new media size, and Assign the changed media size to the corresponding bulk tray.

Before you begin

1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch the bulk tray of which you want to adjust the size. 3. On the control panel, touch [Open] to open the selected bulk tray.

Required tools

Socket wrench

Illustration

[22] Required tools

Adjust the bulk tray

Step Action Illustration

1 [Remove the paper.]

4

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 65 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the bolt at the back side.]

3 [Remove the top paper guide.]

4

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

66 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 [Turn the side paper guide out of the slots.]

4

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 67 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

5 [Place the side paper guide. Align the 4 pins with the desired slots.]

4

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

68 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

6 [Place the top paper guide. Align the 4 pins with the desired slot.]

7 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the bolt.]

8 [Adjust other side] Repeat the previous steps for the front side.

4

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 69 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

9 [Check if all plates are aligned with the corresponding size marks.]

10 [Close the tray.]

11 In the [Trays] view on the control panel, assign the new media size to the bulk tray.

Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray

70 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format

Introduction

The bulk trays are designed to contain the media that you frequently use a lot. Therefore, the paper guides inside the bulk trays are set to a fixed media size.

When the optional bulk tray for small format is installed, you can adjust the size of the bulk tray to A5 or Statement.

NOTE When you want to adjust the size of the bulk tray from A5 or Statement to A4 or Letter, remove the A5 paper guide plates. Change the media size for the selected bulk tray. Assign the new media.

Required tools

Socket wrench

Procedure

1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch the bulk tray of which you want to adjust the size. 3. On the control panel, touch [Open] to open the selected bulk tray. 4. Place the paper guide plates for small format over the existing paper guide plates.

Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 71 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

5. Use the socket wrench to tighten the bolts. 6. Close the tray. 7. Change the media size for the selected bulk tray. [System] -> [Setup] -> [Local key operator

settings] (under [Advanced]) -> [System settings] -> [Bulk tray 1 media size] or [Bulk tray 2 media size].

8. In the [Trays] view on the control panel, assign the new media to the bulk tray.

Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format

72 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)

When to do

When you place small media with a short edge of 182 mm - 203 mm (7.2" - 8.0") in the bulk trays of an external paper module, especially JIS B5.

Before you begin

1. Open a bulk tray of an external paper module. 2. Remove the current media from that bulk tray. 3. Place the media.

Required tools

1 JIS B5 adapter

Place and remove the adapter

Step Action Illustration

1 Place the adapter over the front slider at the right- hand side.

2 Slide the adapter against the media.

3 When you place a larger media type, make sure that you remove the adapter.

NOTE Do not store the adapter inside the paper tray. Otherwise, an er- ror can occur.

Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 73 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)

74 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Process Special Media

Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the [Pre-printed mode] Setting

Introduction

The system is able to handle pre-printed media without problems if the guidelines regarding pre- printed media and inks are taken into account. In case media or inks are used that are not listed in the guidelines, the use of pre-printed media can lead to undesired print quality issues. To prevent print quality issues, a [Pre-printed mode] function is available on the printer. It is advised to enable the [Pre-printed mode] when there are problems with processing pre-printed media. The system will then be cleaned at fixed intervals. It is advised to enable the [Pre-printed mode] only when you process pre-printed media. Afterwards, the function should be disabled.

NOTE Contact your local authorized dealer for the latest guidelines.

Illustration

[23] The [Pre-printed mode] setting

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]). 2. Touch the [Pre-printed mode] button. 3. Press [On].

Process Special Media

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 75 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE Make sure that you put the [Pre-printed mode] setting back to [Off] when you have finished using pre-printed media.

4. Press [OK].

NOTE The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom], which indicates that a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed.

Result

The pre-printed mode is active. At the right-hand side of the dashboard the following icon is displayed.

Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the [Pre-printed mode] Setting

76 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting

Introduction

Wax paper and print quality issues

The printer can handle wax paper. Wax paper is a type of paper that is made moisture-proof through the application of wax. When you use wax paper, the system can become polluted, which can lead to undesired print quality issues. To solve this, a [Wax mode] function is available on the printer. It is advised to use the [Wax mode] in case of problems with processing wax paper. Then the system will be cleaned automatically after printing wax paper. It is advised to enable the [Wax mode] only when you process wax paper. Afterwards, the function should be disabled.

The wax modes

The printer has two wax modes that help you to solve print quality issues with wax paper. Each wax mode consists of two steps: 1. Safe preheating of the system to prevent the deposition of wax. 2. After printing, the printer remains in the stand-by mode to decompose the remaining wax.

Differences between wax mode [1] and [2] Wax mode [2] requires a higher start-up temperature, which increases the start-up time of the

printer. Wax mode [2] requires more time for the decomposition of the wax.

Important information about the cleaning process

The more wax paper you print, the longer the printer needs to decompose the wax. For an optimal performance of the wax mode, do not print more than 50,000 sheets of wax paper. If you must print more, first let the printer run in stand-by mode to decompose the wax, or carry out print jobs that do not require wax paper.

After processing wax paper, do not switch off the printer manually or put the printer into the sleep mode manually. Leave the printer in stand by-mode to allow the cleaning of the wax components. After maximum 2 hours in the stand-by mode, the printer will switch to the sleep mode automatically. If these two hours were not enough to decompose all the wax, the machine remains stand-by after the next job, until all the wax is cleaned.

When to do

Select wax mode [1] when you have print quality issues with wax paper. Only select wax mode [2] when wax mode [1] is not sufficient to solve the print quality issues.

Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 77 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[24] The [Wax mode] setting

IMPORTANT Make sure that you put the [Wax mode] setting back to [Off] when you have finished using wax paper.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]). 2. Touch the [Wax mode] button. 3. Touch [1] or [2]. 4. Press [OK].

The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom]. This indicates that a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed.. The control panel does not display any other reminder that helps you to remember that the [Wax mode] setting is active.

Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting

78 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting

Introduction

Good paper is best run with the highest paper quality factor: [Normal].

Lower grade media such as recycled paper can leave more paper dust in the machine. This can lead to uneven, dark areas on prints with ghosts (echos) of previous pages. If necessary, you can improve the print quality by decreasing the value of the [Paper quality] setting to [Low] or [Lower].

When to do

1. Decrease the [Paper quality] from [Normal] to [Low] when the use of lower grade media causes quality issues.

2. Decrease the [Paper quality] from [Low] to [Lower] when the quality issues are not solved by using the [Low] mode.

NOTE When you change a value of the [Paper quality] setting, a restart of the printer is required. The restart takes 2-3 minutes.

Illustration

[25] The [Paper quality] setting

IMPORTANT Make sure that you put the [Paper quality] setting back to [Normal] when you have finished using fiber-rich media.

Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 79 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]). 2. Touch the [Paper quality] button. 3. Touch [Low] or [Lower]. 4. Press [OK].

The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom]. This indicates that a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed. The control panel does not display any other reminder that helps you to remember that the [Paper quality] setting is active.

Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting

80 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Registration

When to Perform a Media Registration

Examples of when to Perform Media Registration

Introduction

Media registration is an indication for how accurately an image is positioned on a sheet of paper. The position and the form of a printed image can differ slightly from the original image or the digital image. Possible causes: Printer component tolerances. Media size tolerances.

Possible causes: Inaccuracies during the paper production, or The relative humidity or temperature of the environment in which the paper is stored and

used. Media type (glossy media, for example). Job type (1-sided or 2-sided). Feed direction (LEF or SEF) A change of media supplier. A new batch of media.

The different properties of media can influence the alignment of images when the media are printed. This section gives examples of situations when media registration can be required.

NOTE It is recommended to check the media registration after every 500,000 prints. After a software upgrade, you must verify the media registration. When you copy the media catalog from one printer to another, you must verify the media

registration because the media registration depends on the printer and on the media. The situations described are only examples. There are more situations possible when media

registration must be performed.

Example 1 - Images and Text

When you print images and text on a sheet, the following deviations can occur:

The lines on the front and back are not aligned (front-to-back side registration).

4

Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 81 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The image is not in the center of the sheet (shifted image).

The image is skewed (skewed image).

The image is tilted (diamond shape image).

4

Examples of when to Perform Media Registration

82 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The top of the image is smaller than the bot- tom of the image, or the other way around (trapezoid shape image).

The image is reduced or shrunk in the feed di- rection (elongation).

NOTE Combinations of two or more deviations can occur.

Examples of when to Perform Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 83 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Example 2 - Forms

When you print text on forms, the text must be printed in the designated area. For example, an address or a date must be printed at the correct position. Here you see an example where the printed date is not positioned correctly.

23-10-2012 Oc Technologies B.V.

St-Urbanusweg

Venlo, Limburg

Netherlands

5900 MA

Phone: 111-222-3333

Fax: 111-222-4444 www.oce.com

Date:

Ordered By

Company:

Address:

State/Province:

Zip/Postal Code:

Phone:

Fax:

Contact Name:

Deliver To Same as Above

Company:

Address:

State/Province:

Zip/Postal Code:

Phone:

Fax:

Contact Name:

Item Description Quantity Unit Price Amount

Sub-total

Grand Total

Payment

Check payable to

Credit Card

American Express

Mastercard

Visa

Card Number:

Expiration Date:

Cardholder Name:

Data is not secure.

Internal Use Only

Order

Completed:

Ship Date:

Order Form

Examples of when to Perform Media Registration

84 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

How to Perform a Media Registration

Media Registration Quick Start

Introduction

This section gives a general description on how to perform a media registration. A detailed description is given in the sections that follow.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, select the media for which you want to perform the media registration. You can start a media registration from the trays view (touch [Trays] -> [Optimize]), or from the media catalog (touch [System] -> [Media]). There you can select the required media.

[26] Perform the media registration via the trays view

How to Perform a Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 85 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[27] Perform the media registration via the media catalog

2. Touch [Registration]. 3. When you start a media registration from the media catalog, select the feed direction for

which you want to perform the media registration. The media registration can be different for LEF and SEF. When you start a media registration from the trays view, the feed direction is already selected. If the printer is not warmed up, the media registration starts by warming up the printer.

4. Select [Automatic adjustment] or [Manual adjustment]. It is recommended to start with the automatic media registration adjustment. At [Automatic adjustment], touch [Start]. When you select [Manual adjustment], go to step 8.

5. Follow the instructions on the control panel to scan the printed registration sheets. 6. You can verify the result of the automatic registration adjustment on the verification chart.

Touch [Print verification chart] to print the verification chart.

NOTE Depending on the media type and the media size, the dots, circles and lines on the verification chart do not have to match perfectly.

7. If you perceive that the media registration is not optimal, you must perform a manual media registration adjustment. But after automatic media registration, the media registration is optimal in almost all cases. At the [Manual adjustment], touch [Start].

8. In the manual registration adjustment, you can adjust the registration parameters for the front side and the back side separately. Only use [Advanced settings] in exceptional cases. Use [Advanced settings] carefully because these settings influence each other.

Media Registration Quick Start

86 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

A detailed description is given in the sections that follow.

NOTE X means an adjustment in the feed direction. Z means an adjustment perpendicular to the feed direction.

9. You can verify the result of the manual registration adjustment on the verification chart. Touch [Print verification chart] to print the verification chart.

NOTE Depending on the media type and the media size, the dots, circles and lines on the

verification chart do not have to match perfectly. You can also perform a manual media registration via the Settings Editor. The manual

media registration via the control panel is preferred because you can print the verification chart immediately after you changed a setting.

Media Registration Quick Start

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 87 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Order of the Media Registration Actions

Introduction

When the media registration is not optimal, you can take various actions to solve the misalignment. This section describes the order of the actions you must take.

Media Registration Options

Option Where Scope When

Automatic media registration via the control panel. See Media-Specific Registration on page 91.

Control panel

Specific me- dia

Media registration is not opti- mal.

Manual media registration. Only needed in incidental cases. The manual media registration can be done via the control pan- el (see Via the Control Panel on page 96) and via the Settings Editor. The manual media registration via the control panel is prefer- red because you can print the verification chart immediately after you changed a setting. Both procedures have the same result.

Control panel (pre- ferred) Settings Editor

Specific me- dia

Only when the media registra- tion is not optimal after you per- formed the automatic media registration via the control pan- el. Or when the media is 1-sided media, because the automatic media registration prints a 2-si- ded registration print. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing.

If the printer is not warmed up, the media registration starts by warming up the printer.

After you performed one of the media registration options, you can print a verification chart to verify the media registration adjustment. See Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration on page 89.

It can occur that the media registration for a media is correct but the image overlaps some preprinted parts of the media. You must shift the image for that specific preprinted media (see Corrections for Preprinted Media on page 114).

Order of the Actions

Procedure

1. Perform the automatic media registration on the control panel for the media of your current job. Print the job again or print the verification chart to verify if the media registration is correct now. If the media registration is not optimal, continue with step 2 below.

2. Perform a manual media registration adjustment via the control panel (preferred) or via the Settings Editor. Only needed in incidental cases. E.g. media registration is not optimal, media is 1-sided.

Order of the Media Registration Actions

88 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration

Introduction

You can print the verification chart on a specific media to verify if the media registration for that specific media is optimal.

NOTE You cannot print the verification chart on media that you can only print 1-sided because the verification chart is 2-sided. Use your own job to verify if the media registration is optimal. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing.

Before you begin

Before you print the verification chart, make sure that the printer is warmed up. The printer must have printed for at least 20 minutes.

[28] Front side (circles) and back side (dots) of the verification chart for media registration

Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 89 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[29] Print the verification chart via the trays view

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Trays]. 2. Select the media via the tray that contains the media. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration]. 4. You can also select the media via the media catalog.

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the media catalog. 2. Select the media from the media catalog for which you want to print the verification chart for

media registration. 3. Touch [Registration]. 4. Select the feed direction for which you want to print the verification chart.

5. Touch [Print the verification chart]. The verification chart is printed and you can verify the media registration for the selected media. The verification chart has an optimal result when the paper path is filled. Therefore three blank sheets precede the verification chart and two blank sheets are delivered after the verification chart is printed. You are not charged for the blank sheets.

Result

You must use the lines in the corners of the verification chart to measure the registration for manual registration adjustment.

Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration

90 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment

Media-Specific Registration

When to do

When the media registration for a specific media is not optimal.

You can start a media-specific registration from the trays view or from the media catalog. First, the steps of the media registration procedure are described in general.

NOTE The media-specific registration overwrites any automatic or manual media-specific

registration performed previously. You cannot perform media-specific registration for temporary media. You must add the

temporary media to the media catalogue first. You cannot perform an automatic adjustment for media that you can only print 1-sided,

because the adjustment procedure prints 2-sided registration sheets. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For these media, you must perform a manual media registration.

It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty. Otherwise, other jobs can start printing while the media registration takes place.

NOTE When the media is larger than the glass plate (larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed

direction) and / or larger than 297 mm (11.7") in Z direction (perpendicular to the feed direction)), you can still perform media specific registration. The information needed for the automatic adjustment is within the range of the glass plate. You must only enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment for this media. The scanner cannot detect the actual sheet size and assumes the nominal sheet size.

Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 91 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Registration Procedure

1. The system prints a number of registration sheets. 2. Scan the printed registration sheets one by one. First the front side, then the back side. 3. The systems calculates the registration adjustment parameters. 4. The system sets the calculated parameters as default registration parameters for this specific

media.

Start a Media-Specific Registration via the Trays View

1. On the control panel, touch [Trays] to open the trays view.

2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration].

When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction) you get a reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.

4. At [Automatic adjustment], touch [Start]. When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.

5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard. 6. Touch [Next].

Start a Media-Specific Registration from the Media Catalog

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the Media Catalog.

Media-Specific Registration

92 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration. 3. Press [Registration].

When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction) you get a reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.

4. Select the feed direction for which you want to perform the media registration ([LEF registration] or [SEF registration])

5. At [Automatic adjustment], touch [Start]. When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.

6. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard. 7. Press [Next].

Actions for Media-Specific Registration

Step Action Remark

1 Place the registration sheet with number 1 face down on the glass plate, and touch [OK] to scan.

NOTE Make sure that the registration sheets are placed correctly in the left-hand upper corner of the glass plate. Make sure that the registration sheet on the glass plate is not curled or has dog ears. You can use a stack of paper to reduce the curl. You must close the ADF / cover for each scan.

2 Place the registration sheet with number 2 face down on the glass plate, and touch [OK] to scan.

4

Actions for Media-Specific Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 93 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Remark

3 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 with the next registration sheets.

4 The media registration is completed when the control panel displays the message [Remove the registration sheet from the glass plate.] Touch [Next].

5 The control panel displays the message [Do you want to print the verification chart?]. When you touch [Yes], the verifi- cation chart is printed. The automatic media registration is com- pleted.

NOTE The media specific registration adjustment overwrites any au- tomatic or manual media specif- ic registration performed previ- ously.

6

If the adjustment was successful, this icon appears behind the media registered in the media catalog in the Settings Editor.

7 When the following conditions apply, you must enter the actual sheet size via the manual media registration for this media. The media registration is not optimal

and The sheet is larger than 420 mm (16.5")

in X direction (feed direction) and larg- er than 297 mm (11.7") in Z direction (perpendicular to the feed direction).

See Registration Values on page 98. If you do not enter the actual sheet size, you will see a large deviation in front-to- back side registration.

8 Only if the media registration is not opti- mal, continue with the next option.

Print the verification chart to verify if the media registration is optimal now.

Actions for Media-Specific Registration

94 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)

When to Do

You already performed the automatic registration adjustment via the control panel (option 1), but the result is still not optimal, or

The media is 1-sided media. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing.

Description

You can do the manual adjustment of the media registration via the control panel and via the Settings Editor. Both procedures have the same result. The manual adjustment via the control panel is preferred because you can print the verification chart immediately after you changed a setting.

Determine the kind of adjustment you need. This depends on the image on the sheet, for example elongation, image shift or skew.

You can define the following settings: Standard settings for front side and back side

X elongation X offset; in the feed direction Z offset; perpendicular to the feed direction

Advanced settings for front side and back side. Touch [Advanced settings] to display these settings. Trapezoid Diamond Skew

Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 95 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty. Otherwise, other jobs can start printing while the media registration takes place.

Via the Control Panel

Before you begin

NOTE The media-specific registration adjustment overwrites any automatic or manual media

specific registration performed previously. You cannot perform media-specific registration for temporary media. You must add the

temporary media to the media catalogue first.

Print the verification chart to verify the media registration. 1. On the control panel, touch [Trays] to open the trays view.

2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration].

When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction), you get a reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.

4. At [Manual adjustment], touch [Start]. When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.

5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the manual adjustment. 6. Touch [Next].

You can also select the media via the media catalogue, instead of via the trays view. 1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the media catalog.

Via the Control Panel

96 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

2. From the media catalog, select the media for which you want to perform the media registration.

3. Touch [Registration]. When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction), you get a reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.

4. Select the feed direction for which you want to perform the media registration. 5. At [Manual adjustment], touch [Start].

When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears. 6. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the manual adjustment. 7. Touch [Next].

Via the Control Panel

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 97 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Registration Values

Section What to enter

Upper section (1) The actual sheet size measured in the feed di- rection. It is recommended to measure several (6) sheets. Determine the average sheets size in the feed direction. For LEF, enter the sheet width.

[30] For LEF, enter the sheet width

For SEF, enter the sheet length.

[31] For SEF, enter the sheet length

The actual sheet size is used in the front-to- back registration. The actual sheet size has im- pact on the distance between the leading edge of the sheet and the leading edge of the image.

Lower section (2) The required values. Use the verification chart to determine which value to change. The sec- tions hereafter describe how to determine the values you must enter. For most situations you can correct the media registration with the standard settings. Only in exceptional cases, you need the advanced settings.

Via the Control Panel

98 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE You can touch the - and + buttons to change the values. You can also enter the required value directly. Touch the number to enter a value manually. The numeric keyboard appears. There you can enter the required value.

NOTE If you touch [Close] before you apply the changes, the values are not saved.

You must decide whether you want to correct the media registration of the front side or the back side or both. You can base this decision on the processing of the jobs that have an incorrect media registration, for example cutting, booklet making or folding. To correct the media registration of the front side touch [Describe front side]. For the back side, touch [Describe back side].

For 1-sided media you simply have to correct the media registration of the front side. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For 1-sided media you cannot use the verification chart because the verification chart is 2-sided. To perform the media registration you must use your own image to determine the required values.

NOTE In most cases, after automatic media registration you must only adjust the elongation and / or

the image shift. If there are two or more registration problems, you must solve the problems one by one. First

you correct the registration of each side. Then you correct the front-to-back side registration. For example, if the image is skewed and there is a problem with the front-to-back side registration, then you must first adjust the skewed image. If the skewing is correct, you must improve the front-to-back side registration.

NOTE If you are unable to recognize which kind of media registration deviation you have (see Example 1 - Images and Text on page 81), perform the following actions: 1. Measure the value for the skewed image, diamond shape image and trapezoid image. See

the corresponding sections. 2. Select the deviation with the largest value and correct the deviation. Use the corresponding

manual actions described in this document. 3. Print the verification chart. 4. If the angles in the corners are straight then continue with the next step. If not, repeat step 1 -

3. 5. If needed, correct the image shift and / or elongation. Use the corresponding manual actions

described in this document.

Elongation

When to do

Elongation occurs in the feed direction.

Elongation

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 99 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Job Verification chart

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration With elongation, the lines at the left-hand side (leading edge) of the verification chart are at the correct position. The image is elongated / shrunk at the right-hand side (trailing edge) of the sheet.

Procedure

1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has an elongation or the image on the front side. Use the X elongation back to adjust the back side. Use the X elongation front to adjust the front side.

2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between the lines on the front side and the back side at the right-hand side of the sheet. Measure the distance between the vertical lines at the front side and the back side at the top-

right corner. For example, hold the verification chart against the light, or measure the distance between the line and the edge of the sheet on the front side and the back side.

Measure the distance between the vertical lines at the front side and the back side at the bottom-right corner.

Calculate the average value. 3. Calculate this average value as a percentage of the media size in the feed direction.

For example: 1 mm is 0.48% of 210 mm (0.04" is 0.48% of 8.27"). 4. Enter the value according to the table below. 5. Confirm the changed value. 6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Values for the Media Registration

Media Registration

100 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Settings front side What to enter

X elongation (0.01%) The image is elongated or shrunk in incre- ments of 0.01%. A value > 0 elongates the image by moving the trailing edge of the image to the right: The length of the image in the feed direction

increases. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet re- mains the same.

The circles on the right-hand side of the ver- ification chart move to the right (trailing edge).

A value < 0 shrinks the image by moving the trailing edge of the image to the left: The length of the image in the feed direction

decreases. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet re- mains the same.

The circles on the right-hand side of the ver- ification chart move to the left (leading edge).

Settings back side What to enter

X elongation (0.01%) The image is elongated or shrunk in incre- ments of 0.01%. A value > 0 elongates the image by moving the trailing edge of the image to the right: The length of the image in the feed direction

increases. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet re- mains the same.

The dots on the right-hand side of the verifi- cation chart move to the right (trailing edge).

A value < 0 shrinks the image by moving the trailing edge of the image to the left: The length of the image in the feed direction

decreases. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet re- mains the same.

The dots on the right-hand side of the verifi- cation chart move to the left (leading edge).

Ranges

Setting Range

X elongation (0.01%) -500 to +500

Values for the Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 101 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE If the elongation is too great, the image can become larger than the sheet. In this case the image is printed over the edges of the sheet. Risk of reprinting. Risk of system pollution.

Shifted Image

When to do

The image is shifted in the X direction (feed direction) and/or in the Z direction (perpendicular to the feed direction).

Job Verification chart

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration With an image shift, all corners are shifted in the same direction. We assume that the skew is correct.

Procedure

1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side is shifted or the image on the front side. Change the back side if the image on the back side is shifted. Change the front side if the image on the front side is shifted.

2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance that the image is shifted in the feed direction (X) and in the direction perpendicular to the feed direction (Z). Measure the distance between the top-left corner on the front side and the back side in the

feed direction. Measure the distance for all the corners in the feed direction.

Shifted Image

102 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Measure the distance for all the corners in the direction perpendicular to the feed direction. Calculate the average value in the feed direction (X) and the average value in the direction

perpendicular to the feed direction (Z). 3. Enter the values according to the table below. 4. Confirm the changed values. 5. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Values for the Media Registration

Settings front side What to enter

[X offset ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc- tion) in mm (inches). A shift > 0 moves the image to the right-hand side (trailing edge): The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet increa- ses.

The distance between the trailing edge of the sheet and the image on the sheet de- creases.

The circles on the verification chart move to the right-hand side (trailing edge).

A shift < 0 moves the image to the left-hand side (leading edge): The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet de- creases.

The distance between the trailing edge of the sheet and the image on the sheet increa- ses.

The circles on the verification chart move to the left-hand side (leading edge).

[Z offset ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic- ular on the feed direction) in mm (inches). A shift > 0 moves the image to the top of the sheet: The distance between the top of the sheet

and the image on the sheet decreases. The circles on the verification chart move to

the top of the sheet.

A shift < 0 moves the image to the bottom of the sheet: The distance between the top of the sheet

and the image on the sheet increases. The circles on the verification chart move to

the bottom of the sheet.

Values for the Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 103 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Settings back side What to enter

[X offset ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc- tion) in mm (inches). A shift > 0 moves the image to the right-hand side (trailing edge): The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet increa- ses.

The distance between the trailing edge of the sheet and the image on the sheet de- creases.

The dots on the verification chart move to the right-hand side (trailing edge).

A shift < 0 moves the image to the left-hand side (leading edge): The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the image on the sheet de- creases.

The distance between the trailing edge of the sheet and the image on the sheet increa- ses.

The dots on the verification chart move to the left-hand side (leading edge).

[Z offset ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic- ular on the feed direction) in mm (inches). A shift > 0 moves the image to the top of the sheet: The distance between the top of the sheet

and the image on the sheet decreases. The dots on the verification chart move to

the top of the sheet.

A shift < 0 moves the image to the bottom of the sheet: The distance between the top of the sheet

and the image on the sheet increases. The dots on the verification chart move to

the bottom of the sheet.

Ranges

Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)

[X offset ({0})] -5.0 to +5.0 -0.197 to +0.197

[Z offset ({0})] -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098

NOTE If the shift is too much, the image be printed over the edges of the sheet. Risk of reprinting. Risk of system pollution.

Values for the Media Registration

104 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Trapezoid Shape Image

When to do

The trapezoid shape is perpendicular to the feed direction.

Job Verification chart

b

a

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration

Procedure

1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has a trapezoid image or the image on the front side. If the trapezoid image is on the back side, change the back side. If the trapezoid image is on the front side, change the front side.

2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between the corners of the image at the bottom of the sheet and at the top of the sheet. Measure the distance between the bottom-left corner and the bottom-right corner. b in the

figure above. E.g. the distance between the corners is 190.8 mm (7.51").

Measure the distance between the top-left corner and the top-right corner. a in the figure above. E.g. the distance between the corners is 191.3 mm (7.53").

Determine the difference between the distance measured at the bottom and the distance measured at the top. b - a. In the example the measured difference is -0.5 mm (-0.02").

3. Enter the measured difference according to the table below. 4. Confirm the changed value. 5. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

Trapezoid Shape Image

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 105 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Values for the Media Registration

Settings front side What to enter

[Trapezoid ({0})] The image is adjusted in mm (inches). Measured difference > 0: At the bottom of the sheet, the length of the

image in the feed direction decreases. The distance between the circles at the bot-

tom of the verification chart decreases.

Measured difference < 0: At the top of the sheet, the length of the im-

age in the feed direction decreases. The distance between the circles at the top

of the verification chart decreases.

Settings back side What to enter

[Trapezoid ({0})] The image is adjusted in mm (inches). Measured difference > 0: At the bottom of the sheet, the length of the

image in the feed direction decreases. The distance between the dots at the bottom

of the verification chart decreases.

Measured difference < 0: At the top of the sheet, the length of the im-

age in the feed direction decreases. The distance between the dots at the top of

the verification chart decreases.

Ranges

Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)

[Trapezoid ({0})] -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098

Diamond Shape Image

When to do

The diamond shape is perpendicular to the feed direction. You can measure the diamond shape via the diagonal of the image.

Values for the Media Registration

106 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Job Verification chart

b a

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image

Procedure

1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has a diamond shape or the image on the front side. If the diamond shape is on the back side, change the back side. If the diamond shape is on the front side, change the front side.

2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between: The top-right corner and the bottom-left corner. a in the figure above.

For example, the distance is 336.0 mm (13.23"). The top-left corner and the bottom-right corner. b in the figure above.

For example, the distance is 335.0 mm (13.19"). 3. Determine the difference between the second value measured and the first value measured. b - a.

In the example, the measured difference is -1.0 mm (-0.04"). 4. Enter the measured difference according to the table below. 5. Confirm the changed values. 6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 107 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Values for the Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image

Settings front side What to enter

Diamond The image is adjusted in mm (inches). Adjustment > 0: The diagonal from the top-right corner of

the image to the bottom-left corner of the image increases.

The distance between the circle at the top- right corner and the circle at the bottom-left corner increases.

The diagonal from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right corner of the im- age decreases.

The distance between the circle at the top- left corner and the circle at the bottom-right corner decreases.

Adjustment < 0: The diagonal from the top-right corner of

the image to the bottom-left corner of the image decreases.

The distance between the circle at the top- right corner and the circle at the bottom-left corner decreases.

The diagonal from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right corner of the im- age increases.

The distance between the circle at the top- left corner and the circle at the bottom-right corner increases.

Values for the Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image

108 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Settings back side What to enter

Diamond The image is adjusted in mm (inches). Adjustment > 0: The diagonal from the top-right corner of

the image to the bottom-left corner of the image increases.

The distance between the dot at the top- right corner and the dot at the bottom-left corner increases.

The diagonal from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right corner of the im- age decreases.

The distance between the dot at the top-left corner and the dot at the bottom-right cor- ner decreases.

Adjustment < 0: The diagonal from the top-right corner of

the image to the bottom-left corner of the image decreases.

The distance between the dot at the top- right corner and the dot at the bottom-left corner decreases.

The diagonal from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right corner of the im- age increases.

The distance between the circle at the top- left corner and the circle at the bottom-right corner increases.

Ranges

Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)

Diamond -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098

Skewed Image

When to do

The image is skewed (rotated) on the front side and/or on the back side.

Skewed Image

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 109 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Job Verification chart

b

a

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration

Procedure

1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side is skewed or the image on the front side. If the image on the back side is skewed, change the back side. If the image on the front side is skewed, change the front side.

2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between: The leading edge of the sheet and the top-left corner. a in the figure above.

For example, the distance is 10.3 mm (0.40"). The leading edge of the sheet and the bottom-left corner. b in the figure above.

For example, the distance is 9.5 mm (0.37"). 3. Determine the difference between the value measured at the bottom and the value measured at

the top. b - a. This is the skew (rotation). In the example, the measured skew is -0.8 mm (-0.03").

4. Enter the value according to the table below. 5. Confirm the changed value. 6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Media Registration

110 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Values for the Media Registration

Settings front side What to enter

Skew The image is rotated in mm (inches). Adjustment > 0: The image is rotated clockwise. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the circle at the top-left corner is increased.

The distance between the leading edge of the sheet and the circle at the bottom-left corner is decreased.

Adjustment < 0: The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the circle at the top-left corner is decreased.

The distance between the leading edge of the sheet and the circle at the bottom-left corner is increased.

Settings back side What to enter

Skew The image is rotated in mm (inches). Adjustment > 0: The image is rotated clockwise. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the dot at the top-left corner is increased.

The distance between the leading edge of the sheet and the dot at the bottom-left cor- ner is decreased.

Adjustment < 0: The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The distance between the leading edge of

the sheet and the dot at the top-left corner is decreased.

The distance between the leading edge of the sheet and the dot at the bottom-left cor- ner is increased.

Ranges

Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)

Skew -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098

Front-to-Back Side Registration

Introduction

When the front-to-back side registration is not satisfactory: Correct the front side registration.

Values for the Media Registration

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 111 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Correct the back side registration.

Job Verification chart

<-- Feed direction

Media Registration

Before you begin

To correct the front-to-back side registration, you must first get one side correct and then shift the other side in such a way that the front-to-back registration is correct.

Procedure

1. If the verification chart displays a trapezoid image, a diamond shape or skew, use the corresponding manual actions described in this document to correct the registration.

2. Correct the image shift to adjust the front-to-back side registration. 3. If the image is elongated / shrunk, use the corresponding manual actions described in this

document to correct the registration. 4. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.

If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on how the registration looks.

Media Registration

112 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Via the Settings Editor

Before you begin

NOTE It is not preferred to perform the manual media registration via the Settings Editor. The

manual media registration via the control panel is preferred because you can print the verification chart immediately after you changed a setting.

The media specific registration adjustment overwrites any automatic or manual media specific registration performed previously.

Print the verification chart to verify the media registration. 1. Start the Settings Editor application. 2. Click [Media] to open the media catalog. 3. Select the media from the media catalog for which you want to perform the media

registration. 4. Click [Registration].

When you are not logged in, the login screen appears. 5. Enter the username and password to start the registration. 6. Select for which feed direction you to perform the media registration. 7. Enter the required values. The sections related to the manual media registration via the

control panel (see Via the Control Panel on page 96) describe how to determine the values you must enter. Only the [Corrections for preprinted media] are not available on the control panel. These settings are described in this section. For 1-sided media you simply have to correct the media registration of the front side. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For 1- sided media you cannot use the verification chart because the verification chart is 2-sided. To perform the media registration you must use your own image to determine the required values. Possible settings, as displayed in the Settings Editor: Actual sheet size Registration front side

Trapezoid Diamond Skew X elongation (0.01%) X offset Z offset

Registration back side Trapezoid Diamond Skew X elongation (0.01%) X offset Z offset

Corrections for preprinted media (see Corrections for Preprinted Media on page 114) [X image shift front ({0})] [X image shift back ({0})] [Z image shift front ({0})] [Z image shift back ({0})]

8. When the media registration is ready, the icon appears behind the media registered.

Via the Settings Editor

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 113 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE In most cases, after automatic media registration you must only adjust the elongation and / or

the image shift. If there are two or more registration problems, you must solve the problems one by one. First

you correct the registration of each side. Then you correct the front-to-back side registration. For example, if the image is skewed and there is a problem with the front-to-back side registration, then you must first adjust the skewed image. If the skewing is correct, you must improve the front-to-back side registration.

NOTE If you are unable to recognize which kind of media registration deviation you have (see Example 1 - Images and Text on page 81), perform the following actions: 1. Measure the value for the skewed image, diamond shape image and trapezoid image. See

the corresponding sections. 2. Select the deviation with the largest value and correct the deviation. Use the corresponding

manual actions described in this document. 3. Print the verification chart. 4. If the angles in the corners are straight then continue with the next step. If not, repeat step 1 -

3. 5. If needed, correct the image shift and / or elongation. Use the corresponding manual actions

described in this document.

Corrections for Preprinted Media

Introduction

When you use preprinted media, there is a possibility that the image is not at the correct position, even when the media registration is correct. For example, it is possible that a preprinted line along an edge of the media covers part of the printed image. In that case you can perform an image shift for all the jobs that are printed on this media.

Procedure

1. Print a representative job on the preprinted media. 2. Measure the distance that the image must shift for the front side and the back side. 3. In the section [Corrections for preprinted media] enter the values according to the table below. 4. Click [OK]. 5. Print the job again and check if the image is printed at the correct position.

Values

Settings front side What to enter

[X image shift front ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc- tion) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches).

[Z image shift front ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic- ular to the feed direction) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches).

Settings back side What to enter

[X image shift back ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc- tion) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches). 4

Corrections for Preprinted Media

114 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Settings back side What to enter

[Z image shift back ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic- ular to the feed direction) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches).

Ranges

Setting Range (0.1 mm) Range (0.001 inches)

[X image shift front ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969

[X image shift back ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969

[Z image shift front ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969

[Z image shift back ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969

Values

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 115 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media registration: Troubleshooting

Introduction

When you perform media registration some issues can occur. This section gives an overview of known issues and what to do.

Registration of Preprinted Media Fails

Issue

The registration of preprinted media fails.

Cause

When the registration sheet contains more information than expected, the scanner has difficulties to perform the measurements.

Solution

Perform a manual media registration on the preprinted media. Perform an automatic media registration on the same media without the preprinted

information. Perform an automatic media registration on a media similar to the preprinted media. The

similar media must not contain any preprinted information.

Media registration: Troubleshooting

116 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory

Issue

The result of an automatic media registration on sheets longer than 420 mm (16.5") is not satisfactory.

Cause

The automatic media registration cannot handle sheets longer than 420 mm (16.5"). The automatic media registration assumes the nominal sheet length of the media.

Solution

Measure the actual sheet length and enter this value via the manual media registration.

Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 117 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable)

Issue

After you performed the paper path registration the image can be shifted in X direction (feed direction). This offset occurs mainly when you use A4 or Letter for the paper path registration.

Cause

Possible causes: The bulk media has media registration settings from a previous media registration setting. The sheet length of the bulk media differs from the nominal sheet length for this media. The paper path registration for A3/Ledger was performed before the paper path registration for

A4/Letter. The printer is not sufficiently warmed-up. The mentioned offset in X direction (feed direction) is

related to the temperature of the environment and how much the printer is warmed up.

Solution

Perform one or more of the following actions depending on the possible cause: Set the media specific registration settings of the bulk media to 0. Perform the paper path

registration again. Enter the actual measured sheet length of the bulk media via the manual media registration

adjustment. First perform the paper path registration for A4/Letter and after that perform the paper path

registration for A3/ledger. Make sure that the printer is warmed up. The printer must have printed for at least 20 minutes.

Perform the paper path registration again. Perform a manual media registration adjustment for the bulk media.

Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable)

118 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions

Introduction

In this section you find answers to some frequently asked questions regarding media registration.

Question Answer

What should you do after a software update?

After a service technician upgraded the software you must verify the media registration. You can print the ver- ification chart to verify if the media registration is opti- mal (see Print the Verification Chart for Media Registra- tion on page 89).

What should you do after you copied the media catalog?

When you copy the media catalogue from one printer to another printer you must verify the media registration. You can print the verification chart to verify if the media registration is optimal (see Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration on page 89). The media registra- tion depends on the printer and on the media.

How do you perform a media regis- tration for temporary media?

You cannot perform media specific registration for tem- porary media. First add the temporary media to the me- dia catalog. Next, perform the media registration for the selected media.

How do you perform a media regis- tration of 1-sided media? Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper back- ing.

You must perform a manual media registration. You cannot perform the automatic adjustment for media that you can only print 1-sided, because the adjustment pro- cedure prints 2-sided registration sheets. You cannot print the verification chart for 1-sided media because the verification chart is 2-sided. Use your own job to determine the required values and to verify the media registration.

Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions

Chapter 5 - Media Handling 119 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions

120 Chapter 5 - Media Handling Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 6 Carry Out Print Jobs

The Print Function

Where to Define Print Job Settings

Introduction

Print jobs can vary from straightforward jobs with only a few settings to complex jobs with extended settings. Therefore, there are several possibilities to define the settings for your print jobs. For straightforward jobs, the use of the printer driver can be fine. If you often print recurring jobs with identical, complex settings, the use of automated workflows or hotfolders can be the best way to print your jobs. This section gives an overview of various possibilities.

NOTE It is strongly recommended to define the settings for a print job in only one place, for example in a printer driver or in an automated workflow, but not in both. Otherwise, undesired output results can occur because settings can become mixed.

Where to Define Print Job Settings

Define the job settings

Item Description

PDL settings The job will be printed using either the PDL default settings as defined in the Settings Editor, or the PDL settings that were defined in a job itself, as interpreted

by the PDL.

Job ticket The job will be printed using the settings that were defined in the printer driver. When you frequently print jobs with identical settings, you can use the template function of the printer driver. Templates contain pre- defined job settings. You can also create your own custom tem- plates.

Hotfolder Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring print workflows. In these workflows, identical PDFs or other printable files with identi- cal settings are printed on a regular basis. The advantage of a hot- folder is that you do not have to open a file and check the settings before printing. Operators can see hotfolders as a folder on their workstation where they can simply drag & drop files. A hotfolder option is the default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf') in a hot- folder, which defines the settings for the print jobs. The files will be printed according to settings of the hotfolder default ticket in that hotfolder.

Automated workflow Automated workflows are LPR print queues that you can program- med to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows are primarily aimed at recurring print jobs with identical settings that must be printed the same way as before. The advantage of auto- mated workflows is that you do not have to open a file and check the settings before printing. 4

The Print Function

122 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Item Description

Control panel After a print job has arrived on the PRISMAsync controller, the print job becomes visible on the control panel. There you can change a number of job settings or combine print jobs, for exam- ple. It is best to change the print job settings in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the optional [DocBox]. With the optional [Page pro- gramming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and finishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

NOTE You can only make changes to jobs that are currently not being printed.

Where to Define Print Job Settings

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 123 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print a Job Using the Printer Driver

Main Features of the Printer Driver

Feature Description

Settings You can define a large number of settings for layout, paper, finish- ing and image.

Templates When you want to use a number of printer driver settings more than one time, you can create a template. A template is a set of default settings that describe a print job. You do not need to change each individual setting. Simply select a template that matches your desires.

Secure printing You can add a PIN to your job to prevent unauthorized printing of your job.

How to Get the Latest Printer Driver

Via the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller, under [Support] -> [Software] -> [Download printer driver].

From the web site of the printer manufacturer.

NOTE The online helps of the printer drivers contain detailed information about all functions of the printer drivers.

Procedure

1. From the 'File' menu of your application, click 'Print'. 2. Select the varioPRINT 135 Series in the 'Printer' area of the 'Print' dialog box. 3. Click 'Properties'. 4. Define the required settings. 5. Click 'OK.'

Print a Job Using the Printer Driver

124 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)

Introduction

PRISMAprepare (optional) is a software application that enables you to prepare your print jobs on page level. You can preview the result per page.

This procedure describes the most important steps for the preparation of print jobs.

NOTE See the online help of PRISMAprepare for all the details.

Procedure

1. Prepare the document.

[32] Lay out preparation with PRISMAprepare

2. Use the media catalog to define the media. With PRISMAprepare you can export the media catalog to PRISMAsync controllers.

Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 125 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[33] The media catalog in PRISMAprepare

3. Define the required finishing options.

Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)

126 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print a File from a USB Drive

Introduction

You can print documents (*.pdf, *.ps, *.prn, *.xps files) on a USB drive.

Illustration

[34] Example of a folder structure on the USB drive

Print a File from a USB Drive

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 127 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[35] Save a file to a different location

Procedure

1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [USB]. 3. Touch to browse through the directories on the USB drive. 4. Touch the file or files you want to print, or touch [Select] to select multiple files. 5. Touch [Print] to send the file to the list of [Scheduled jobs] immediately, or 6. Touch [Save] to save a copy of the file to another location on your printer such as the list of

[Waiting jobs] or a DocBox. Then you can edit the file first and print the file from the other location The locations you can select depend on your system configuration.

7. Remove the USB drive from the control panel when the USB LED on the control panel is off.

Print a File from a USB Drive

128 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Stop the Printer

Introduction

The printer can stop in two ways. Manually

Use the Stop button or the [Stop after job] button to stop the printer. Automatically

Define a corresponding setting in the workflow profiles.

Stop the Printer Manually

Manual stop

When to stop Action Description

After a set Press the Stop button one time

The printer stops when the currently printed set of the active print job is completed.

The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a vertical green bar, and the message [Stopping after set...].

When the set is completed, the vertical green bar changes into red and the message [On hold] appears.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE It depends on the set size and the moment you press the Stop button when the printer will stop. For example, when you have a large set of 1,000 pages and you press the Stop button

after the first page, the printing will continue for a couple of minutes.

As soon as possi- ble

Press the Stop button two times

The printer stops when the printer buffer is empty (as soon as possible).

The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a vertical red bar, and the message [Stopping as soon as possible...].

When the printer buffer is empty, the message [On hold] appears.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE The buffer can contain up to 50 pages. Be- cause the printer stops when the buffer is empty, it is possible that the last printed set is not complete. 4

Stop the Printer

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 129 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

When to stop Action Description

After a job Touch the [Stop after job] button

In [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] you must se- lect the job after which the printer must stop. Then touch the [Stop after job] button.

A horizontal, red and white stop bar indicates that the stop-after-job function is active.

The printer stops when the last job before the stop bar is completed.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE The [Stop after job] button is not available when the [Confirm start of job] setting in the active [Workflow profile] is set to [On]. Then the printer stops automatically after each job.

NOTE When you print streaming jobs or jobs that consist of 1 large set, you must press the Stop button two times to stop the printer as soon as possible.

Automatic stop

When Then

The [Check first set] setting in a [Workflow profile] is [On], and

The [Check first set] setting is also enabled in the job.

The printer stops each time the first set of a print job is completed. You can check the first set before you continue the print job.

The [Confirm start of job] setting in a [Work- flow profile] is [On].

The printer stops each time at the start of a new job. You must start each job manually.

Stop the Printer

130 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Delete Print Jobs

Locations where You Can Delete Print Jobs

You can delete jobs from the following locations. List of [Printed jobs] (if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor). List of [Scheduled jobs]. List of [Waiting jobs]. [DocBox] (optional).

NOTE You can only delete the active print job in the list of [Scheduled jobs] when the printer is on hold. If necessary, press the Stop button two times to put the printer on hold.

Select the Jobs You Want to Delete

The table below describes your options to select one or more jobs.

Select one or more jobs that you want to delete

What to delete? How to do?

One or more separate jobs Select the desired location described above. Touch the jobs one by one.

All jobs Select the desired location. Touch [Select] -> [All].

[Jobs with available media] Select the desired location. Touch [Select] -> [Jobs with available media].

[Jobs with label] Select the desired location. Touch [Select] -> [Jobs with label].

[Printed jobs] in the [Doc- Box]

Select the [DocBox]. Touch [Select] -> [Printed jobs].

New jobs in the [DocBox] Select the [DocBox]. Touch [Select] -> [New jobs].

NOTE For the list of [Printed jobs], you can indicate in the Settings Editor that the list must be cleaned automatically at specified times. The factory default is one day. Furthermore, in the Settings Editor you can manually clean up the jobs in the lists of [Printed jobs], [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

Procedure

1. Go to one of the following locations. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]

If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs]. Touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]

2. Select the jobs you want to delete. 3. Press [Delete].

A message appears. 4. When you are sure that you want to delete the selected job(s), touch [Yes].

Delete Print Jobs

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 131 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Introduction

Usually, the settings for a print job is defined in PDLs, applications, printer drivers, automated workflows, or hotfolder default tickets. However, when a job has arrived on the PRISMAsync controller, you can change a number of job settings for all jobs that are currently not being printed. This section gives an overview of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel.

With the [Properties] button you view and partly change the job settings of the jobs in the following queues. [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

You cannot change the settings of an active job. [Printed jobs] (view settings only)

You can partly define the following settings for the jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] and the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The characteristics of the output Generic settings that apply to the whole job.

1

2

3

4

5

Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel

132 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Number Pane Description

1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the settings you can de- fine for the paper originals

2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job

3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the settings you can define for the job

4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output.

5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car- ry out. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and fin- ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

[1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on one side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 133 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Binding edge]

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge]

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding

edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding

edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the top.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

[Media]

Setting Values Description

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalogue

Here you can select the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary me- dia. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor.

NOTE You can only change to media with the same size, for example, from A4 blue to A4 green.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

134 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Cover]

Setting Values Description

[Cover]

[Front]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Front] is [On] then the [Media] setting below [Front] becomes enabled.

[Media] When [Front] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalog to use as front cover.

[Print sides] When [Front] is [On], you can indicate which side of the front cover must be printed. You can select. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Back] is [On] then the [Media] set- ting below [Back] becomes enabled.

[Media] When [Back] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalogue to use as back cover.

[Print sides] When [Back] is [On], you can indicate which side of the back cover must be printed. You can select: [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 135 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Layout]

Name of the setting Available options Description

[Layout]

[Normal]

The printer prints the pages with no special layout settings.

[Booklet]

The printer prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The printer prints the same image 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 times on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images.

[Same-up flipped] The printer prints the same image on 1 side of a sheet. The images are rotated compared to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If necessary, use the Zoom function to reduce or enlarge the size of the images.

[Zoom]

Name of the setting Available options Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so it fits onto the page. When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the image is maintained.

[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview pane immediately shows the results of your action.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

136 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 137 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Shift]

Setting Values Description

[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output, for example. Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output, for example. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

138 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Print delivery]

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 1 [Output location] Select the output location for the job. Depend- ing on the settings for your copy job, the ma- chine automatically suggests the preferred output location for your job. However, you can manually overrule this suggestion. [Stacker/stapler upper tray]

Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Stacker/stapler lower tray] Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Stacker/stapler booklet tray] Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Folder main tray] Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the folder.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in the workflow profile.

[Each set] Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to recognize individual sets.

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca- tion are stacked in a straight stack.

[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad- vanced settings when an offline finisher pro- cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please refer to the finisher manuals for more informa- tion. 4

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 139 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 2 [Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.

[Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in landscape position (horizon- tal). 4

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

140 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 3 [Print order] [Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Rotation] [0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Print quality]

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] 1 [Brightness] (default 0)

When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the brightness can correct this prob- lem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed ras- tered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

[Advanced settings] The advanced settings are intended for special print jobs, such as printing bar codes or print- ing a color image on a B/W printer.

[Fattening] (default [Off])

The fattening function can increase the reada- bility of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72 inch). However, when you print special data such as bar codes, fattening can make bar codes diffi- cult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fatten- ing function off when you print such special data.

[Minimum line width] (default [On])

The minimum line width function is required to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600 inch. However, when you print special data such as CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required. Therefore, you can turn the minimum line width function off. Then even thinner lines will be printed. 4

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 141 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] 2 [RIP resolution] (de- fault [600x2400] dpi)

The RIP resolution can improve the readability of fine details. When you print very thin, slan- ted lines, for example in Chinese characters, 1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is best suited for mainly horizontal and vertical objects.

[RIP raster] (default [LINE_200LPI])

The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best suited for over 95% of all prints. In special ca- ses, for example moir patterns from scanned images, you can try to improve the print result with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the [DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may loose some fine details. The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is [LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compati- ble with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and 1200x1200 dpi.

[Color profile] (default [Normal])

You can use color profiles when you print col- or images on a B&W printer. The selected col- or profile determines how a color image is re- produced in black and white. [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by

Oc that converts CMYK or RGB data into different gray values in a contrast-balanced way. When you select [Enhanced], the im- ages will become lighter, softer and less contrast-rich.

[Normal] is a color profile developed by Adobe that converts color data into gray values. When you select [Normal], the im- ages will become darker and more contrast- rich.

NOTE You can also use your own color profiles. Make the required settings in the Settings Editor.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

142 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Binding]

Setting Values Description

[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta- ples. Furthermore you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for one staple: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for two staples: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitching]

[Folding]

This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 143 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Folding]

[None]

[Z-fold]

Required output location for Z-folded A4R, Let- terR and Legal: Folder output tray, or Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.

NOTE Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17" sheets must be sent to the stacker/ stapler.

[Z-fold large sheets only]

Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Tri-fold in]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Tri-fold out]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Parallel fold]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on which side to print: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selec- tion.

[Trimming]

This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

144 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.

[Trim size]

You can indicate the amount of trimming at the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to 20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")

[Finishing size]

You can indicate the size of the resulting docu- ment after trimming. You can either touch [Size] to select a default media size or manual- ly define the width and length of the docu- ment. When you define a non-standard media size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].

[Punching]

This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.

Setting Values Description

[Punching]

[None]

Here you can select the required number and the location of the punch holes. Location: [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set dependent]

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 145 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Number of sets]

Setting Values Description

[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled, the printer stops after the first set of a job has been printed. You can check the quality of the output.

NOTE This setting is only available when in the workflow profile [Check first set] is set to [As in job].

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job you need. You can enter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

Job Name

Setting Values Description

[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change the name of the job. When you touch the [Job name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can change the name of the job.

[Page range]

Setting Values Description

[Page range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will be printed.

[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, use the [From] and [To] fields to indicate the first and last pa- ges you want printed.

[Separator sheets]

Setting Values Description

[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is ena- bled, a separate sheet is inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear dis- tinction between two sets. Separator sheets are always empty. In the Settings Editor, select a media from the media catalog use as separa- tor sheets. You can also indicate the feed di- rection of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.

Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel

146 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing

Introduction

The selected workflow determines the destination of jobs. When jobs go to the list of [Waiting jobs], you must manually send the jobs to the print queue (list of [Scheduled jobs]). This enables you to keep full control of all jobs that must be printed.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs]. 3. Touch the job(s) you want to print, or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two seconds.

4. Press [Print]. The job is moved to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].

Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 147 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print an Urgent Job Immediately

Introduction

When a job must be printed urgently, you can give that print job priority over all other print jobs. The [Print now] button allows you to print a job immediately. When you use the [Print now] button, the active print job will be paused as soon as the current set is ready.

To print a job as soon as possible but not immediately, you can use the [To top] function.

Locations of the [Print now] Button

The [Print now] button is available at the following locations. List of [Scheduled jobs]. DocBox (optional).

NOTE To give priority to a job in the list of [Waiting jobs], you must first touch [Print] to send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now]. To give priority to a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first reprint the job. The job is sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. From there, you must send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job which you want to print immediately. 4. Press [Print now].

The urgent job appears at the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The active print job is paused as soon as the current set is ready and becomes second in the list.

Print an Urgent Job Immediately

148 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Give Priority to a Print Job

Introduction

When you want to print a job as soon as possible, but not necessarily immediately, you must use the [To top] function. The [To top] function moves the selected job to the second position in the list of [Scheduled jobs], below the active print job . The job will be printed when the active print job is ready.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job to which you want to give priority. 4. Press [To top].

Give Priority to a Print Job

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 149 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print a Scheduled Job Later

Introduction

The machine prints the jobs that are present in the list of [Scheduled jobs] jobs.

However, you can decide to print a job later, for example because: The required media are out of stock, or You first want to make a proof.

Then you must move the job back to the list of [Waiting jobs].

NOTE To select the active print job you must first press the Stop button 2x to stop the job.

NOTE To select the active print job you must first press the Stop button two times to stop the job.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job or jobs you want to print later or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two seconds.

4. Press [Move]. The job is moved to the list of [Waiting jobs].

Print a Scheduled Job Later

150 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Reprint a Job

Introduction

NOTE The following description is only applicable when the setting [Printed jobs] in the Settings Editor is enabled.

Print jobs that have been completed are moved from the list of [Scheduled jobs] list to the list of [Printed jobs]. The [Printed jobs] list helps you to reprint jobs quicker and easier.

The List of Printed Jobs

When you want to reprint a job, the selected job is always copied to the list of [Waiting jobs] first.

You cannot change the job settings in the list of [Printed jobs]. This is only possible in the list of [Waiting jobs].

You cannot reprint streaming jobs. The list of [Printed jobs] does not store proof prints, system jobs and jobs that were stopped or

deleted. When you shut down the printer all jobs remain present in the list of [Printed jobs]. The list of [Printed jobs] can only store jobs. To prevent the disk of your system from becoming

full, jobs must be deleted manually or automatically on a regular basis. In the Settings Editor, you can indicate the cleaning period, then the clean-up is carried out at midnight or at the next start-up (in general the next morning).

If E-shredding is enabled, the jobs will be shredded after removal from the list of [Printed jobs].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]. 2. Touch the job(s) you want to reprint or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two seconds.

3. Press [Copy]. 4. Touch [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. 5. Touch the job you want to reprint. 6. Touch [Properties] if you want to change the settings, for example the number of sets. 7. Press [Print].

Reprint a Job

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 151 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Select more than One Job for Printing

Introduction

The table below describes the possibilities to select more than one job for printing.

Select more jobs

Options Description

Select two or more jobs manually

Touch the jobs you want to print one by one.

[Select] button - [All] All jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] are printed. The order in the list of [Waiting jobs] determines the print order. However, in the list of [Scheduled jobs] you can give priority to a job.

[Select] button - [Jobs with available media]

All jobs for which the required media are currently available in the paper trays, will be printed. This improves the productivity, be- cause you must not change the required media during printing. You may only need to add more of the currently available media types.

[Select] button - [Jobs with label]

A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on the control panel. When a job is sent to the printer, the person who submits the job can add a label to that job. The label can be any name that helps to identify certain jobs. The label can be de- fined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated work- flow. When the label in the printer driver is identical to a defined automated workflow, then the print job will be printed with the settings of this automated workflow. For example, the label Cus- tomer XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Waiting jobs], or go to a DocBox. 3. Touch the jobs you want to print one by one, or make a selection using the [Select] button.

The selected jobs are highlighted. 4. Press [Print].

Select more than One Job for Printing

152 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]

Introduction

The bundle function allows you to combine two or more jobs into one new job. For example, this can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order. Often, the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance. Normally, this means that you must print the documents first and sort or staple them later. By using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and print all documents in the correct order in only 1 print job.

Important Information About the Bundle Function

You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the [Properties] window. By default, the number of sets for a bundled job is one. So before printing, you must first

indicate the required number of sets. When you stop a job after a set, the printing stops after one copy of the complete bundle. The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs. All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location. Otherwise, the control panel

displays a warning message. To continue, you must first split the bundled job, then change the individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again.

Main Actions on the Bundle Function

The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function.

Main bundle functions

Main actions Description

[Bundle] When you touch [Bundle] after selecting two or more jobs, a new job is created that contains the original jobs. The new job is added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. The original jobs are re- moved from the list. The new job gets a new name that is based on the name of the first job in the bundle.

[Split] When you touch [Split] after selecting a bundled job, the job is split into the original, separate jobs. The bundled job is removed. The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can use the [Split] function to correct mismatched set- tings, for example.

Change job settings The [Properties] window gives access to a pane where you can do the following. Change a number of job settings. Change the order of the jobs in the bundle.

[Delete] Delete the job.

[Ticket] Print the job ticket of the job.

[Proof] Print one copy of the job first to check if the result meets your ex- pectations.

Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 153 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[36] The [Create bundle] window

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. 2. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple

jobs at once. 3. Press [Bundle].

A [Create bundle] window appears that allows you to make some changes. 4. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 5. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of bundles]. 6. Press [OK].

Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]

154 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print a Job Ticket

Introduction

Job tickets are used to transfer settings from an application to the printer. It can be convenient to print a job ticket before printing a job, to get an overview of the main job characteristics.

Job tickets can contain the following information, for example. Job name. Job owner. Job destination. Job settings such as the number of sets. Required media.

Where to Find the [Ticket] Button

The [Ticket] button is available at the following sections of the control panel. [Scheduled jobs]. [Waiting jobs]. [Printed jobs] (if enabled in the Settings Editor). [DocBox] (in the drop-down list ).

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs]. 2. Select one of the locations mentioned above. 3. Touch one or more jobs of which you want to print the job ticket. 4. Press [Ticket].

The job is sent to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job may not be immediately visible in the list of [Scheduled jobs]. You can recognize the job by the prefix @_ in front of the job name.

Print a Job Ticket

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 155 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Make a Proof

Introduction

You can make a proof to check whether the quality and the layout of the output meet your expectations. When you use the [Proof] function, the machine prints one copy of the job. You can only make a proof for a job in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox] (optional).

When you make a proof, the printed set is not subtracted from the defined total number of sets for a job. For example, if you need 10 sets the printer will still print 10 sets after you made the proof. This is different from the checking of the first set.

Locations of the [Proof] Button

The [Proof] button is available at the following locations. List of [Waiting jobs]. [DocBox] (optional).

NOTE To make a proof of a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first touch [Copy] to copy the job to the list of [Waiting jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Proof].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs]. 2. Select one of the locations mentioned above. 3. Touch the job of which you want to print a proof.

NOTE You can select multiple jobs.

4. Press [Proof]. A copy of the job goes to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The original job remains in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox]. You can recognize a proof by the magnifying glass on the job icon .

Make a Proof

156 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the Schedule (Option)

Introduction to the [Schedule] View

Introduction

The [Schedule] is your daily planning board for print jobs. The [Schedule] helps you to keep the machine running.

This section shows and describes the main parts of the [Schedule].

NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.

NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.

Illustration

[37] The [Schedule] view

Use the Schedule (Option)

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 157 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

1. The Jobs Pane

The jobs pane shows the jobs on a timeline. The width of the job corresponds to the (remaining) print time. A vertical line separates the jobs. The vertical line moves to the left as the printing of a job progresses.

An icon and the job name represent a job. The icon indicates the state of the job, for example printing .

Furthermore, the icon indicates the stop moments of the machine. For example, when the setting [Confirm start of job] in the workflow profiles (see list of references below) is set to [On] or when you use the [Stop after job] function.

2. The [Required media] Pane

The [Required media] pane displays the media that are required for each scheduled job. For each required media, the media properties are displayed (see list of references below). The bars show the availability of the media. The bars can have the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The required media is available.

Orange The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Yellow The system cannot determine the exact number of sheets that is availa- ble in the paper trays.

Red The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

When you print small jobs, the bars for these jobs may not be completely visible. To prevent that you do not see the status of these small jobs, the operator panel can show the following images.

NOTE When you set the zoom control (5) to a shorter time-scale, in most cases the operator panel will display bars for these small jobs.

The possible display of small jobs

Image Description

Green. The required media is available.

Orange. The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Red. The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

3. The Media Toolbar

The media toolbar displays the following information for the media that is selected in the [Required media] pane. Furthermore, the media type toolbar contains the [Load] button to load and assign the required media.

Introduction to the [Schedule] View

158 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The icons in the media toolbar

Icon Description

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When the paper module indicator is completely grey, this means that not one of the required media is available in the paper trays.

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in green, the highlighted paper tray contains a media that is required by one of the scheduled jobs.

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in blue, the highlighted pa- per tray contains the media that is also highlighted in blue in the list of [Required media].

4. The Output Locations Pane

The output locations pane displays the output locations that are required for the scheduled jobs. The bars show the availability of the output locations. The bars can have the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The output location is required and available.

Orange The output location is required in the future, but not available then. For example, because the output location will be full soon.

Red The output location is required now, but not available. For example, be- cause the output location is full.

Gray The output location is required, but availability is unknown.

5. The Zoom Control

The zoom control enables you to adjust the time scale visible in the [Schedule]. When you touch the zoom button, a drop-down list appears. Then you can select the desired time scale (five minutes - eight hours).

Introduction to the [Schedule] View

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 159 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Load Media via the [Schedule] View

Introduction

When the [Schedule] view is available on your printer, you can load and assign the required media directly in the [Schedule] section.

NOTE When you load a different media size, you must also set the paper guides inside the paper tray to the correct dimensions. You cannot change the media size for the internal bulk trays one and two. These are preset to a fixed media size. To switch to another media size for the bulk trays, these trays must be adapted manually first.

Illustration

[38] Load the media

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch the button for the media you want to load, for example Special A4. 2. Press [Load].

The [Trays] view appears. 3. On the screen, touch the paper tray where you want to load the media. 4. Touch [OK] to open the paper tray. 5. Load the media into the paper tray.

The system assumes you loaded the selected media type, in this example Special A4. The system will automatically assign Special A4 to that paper tray.

NOTE You can always change the assigned media type later by touching the [Assign] button.

6. Gently close the paper tray.

Load Media via the [Schedule] View

160 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel

Change the [Output] Settings

Change Two-Sided into One-Sided and Vice Versa

Introduction

Jobs for which [1-sided] or [2-sided] printing was defined, will be printed on either one side or both sides of a sheet. If required, you can change this setting.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [1- or 2-sided] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 161 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Binding Edge

Introduction

The binding edge determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the media. The binding edge is usually set via the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the binding edge via the operator panel. The binding edge has a relation with the direction of the margin shift, orientation and staple position.

When the binding edge is changed for two-sided printing, the image orientation is automatically adjusted to get the correct layout. The orientation of the image on the back side of the page will be changed too.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Binding edge] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Binding Edge

162 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Select Another Media for a Job

Introduction

If you want to print a job on other media than originally defined for that job, you can select a different media via the operator panel. Requirements regarding the new media: The media must be available in the media catalog. The media must have the same size as the original media.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. In the preview pane at the right-hand side, touch the media you want to change.

When more than one media was defined for a job, the preview pane displays a separate button for each media.

5. From the list, select the new media. 6. Press [OK].

Select Another Media for a Job

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 163 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Settings for Covers

Introduction

When front covers or back covers are required, the settings are usually set in the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the settings for the covers via the control panel.

You can change the following settings for both the front cover and the back cover separately. Enable or disable the use of a cover. Select the desired media from the media catalog. Indicate whether the cover must be left empty, printed one-sided, or printed two-sided.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Cover] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Settings for Covers

164 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of your changes.

The [Align] function allows a rough image shift. You can select one of the following settings:

[Align] values

When you select: Then the image is moved to:

[Top left] The upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center] The upper center of the sheet.

[Top right] The upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left] The left-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.

[Center] The middle of the sheet.

[Center right] The right-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.

[Bottom left] The lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center] The lower center of the sheet.

[Bottom right] The lower right corner of the sheet.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Align] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 165 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. However, when the [Align] function is not precise enough, you can use the [Margin shift] and [Image shift] functions. These functions allow you to shift the image more precisely. The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of your changes. If you shift the margin too much, you may loose part of the image.

The [Shift] function has two options. [Margin shift] allows you to increase or decrease the margin horizontally to create more

binding space, for example. With [Margin shift], you can shift an image relative to the binding edge.

[Image shift] allows you to move the image horizontally and vertically. This gives you more freedom in moving the image exactly to the desired position.

By default, the values of the front side and the back side are linked. To define different values for each side, touch . The changes you make are valid for the whole document, not only for the current page.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Shift] button. 5. Make the required changes.

NOTE You can touch the - and + buttons to change the values. You can also enter the required value directly. Touch the number to enter a value manually. The numeric keyboard appears. There you can enter the required value.

6. Press [OK].

Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout

166 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Print Delivery Settings

Introduction

Usually the print delivery settings have been defined in the printer driver. This section describes how to change some settings on the control panel.

Overview of the Print Delivery Settings

Setting Description

[Output location] Change the output location for the job. The list shows all the out- put locations that are available for your system. Make sure there is a match between the selected output location and the job requirements. For example, when a job requires sta- ples, you must select an output location that allows stapling.

[Sort] Change the sorting method of the prints. You can select sort [By page] or [By set].

[39] Sort by page

[40] Sort by set

[Offset stacking] Stack the prints with an offset. This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting of the active [Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].

[Advanced settings] Finishing equipment often requires that the printed sheets are de- livered in a certain order. For finishers that are integrated in your printing system, the required settings are adapted automatically. However, sometimes it can be necessary to change a number of settings manually, for example when you want to finish the prints using offline finishers. If required, you can change the [Sheet or- der], [Sheet orientation], [Print order] and [Rotation].

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Print delivery] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Print Delivery Settings

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 167 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Stacking Method per Job

Introduction

The [Offset stacking] function creates a visible distinction between sets or jobs in an output location. The active workflow profile or the active automated workflow determines the default type of offset stacking.

You can only change the type of [Offset stacking] per job when the [Offset stacking] setting of the active [Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

NOTE Remember that you can only change the stacking method per job when the active [Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Print delivery] button. 5. Touch the [Offset stacking] button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Stacking Method per Job

168 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Print Quality Settings

Introduction

The print quality settings help you to optimize the quality of your prints. You can use the following applications to change the print quality settings. Printer drivers. Job submission applications such as PRISMAprepare. The control panel of your printer. The Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.

In the printer driver, in PRISMAprepare and on the control panel, you can change the settings per job. In the Settings Editor, you can change the settings for all upcoming jobs.

The tables below describe both the basic and advanced print quality settings you can change through the control panel.

Basic Settings

Basic print quality settings

Basic settings Description

[Brightness] (default 0) When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the bright- ness can correct this problem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed rastered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

NOTE Each of the 35 combinations of contrast and brightness settings corresponds to a specific transfer curve (i.e. transfer.ps file). In the Settings Editor, you can change the default settings for contrast and brightness adjustments for jobs that do not ask for any brightness or contrast adjustment.

Advanced Settings

Advanced print quality settings

Advanced settings Description

[Fattening] (default [Off]) The fattening function can increase the readability of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72 inch). However, when you print special data such as bar codes, fattening can make bar codes difficult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fattening function off when you print such special data.

[Minimum line width] (de- fault [On])

The minimum line width function is required to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600 inch. However, when you print special data such as CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required. Therefore, you can turn the mini- mum line width function off. Then even thinner lines will be prin- ted. 4

Change the Print Quality Settings

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 169 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Advanced settings Description

[RIP resolution] (default [600x2400] dpi)

The RIP resolution can improve the readability of fine details. When you print very thin, slanted lines, for example in Chinese characters, 1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is best suit- ed for mainly horizontal and vertical objects.

[RIP raster] (default [LINE_200LPI])

The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best suited for over 95% of all prints. In special cases, for example moir patterns from scanned images, you can try to improve the print result with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the [DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may loose some fine details. The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is [LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compatible with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and 1200x1200 dpi.

[Color profile] (default [Normal])

You can use color profiles when you print color images on a B&W printer. The selected color profile determines how a color image is reproduced in black and white. [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by Oc that converts

CMYK or RGB data into different gray values in a contrast-bal- anced way. When you select [Enhanced], the images will be- come lighter, softer and less contrast-rich.

[Normal] is a color profile developed by Adobe that converts color data into gray values. When you select [Normal], the im- ages will become darker and more contrast-rich.

NOTE You can also use your own color profiles. Make the re- quired settings in the Settings Editor.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Press [Print quality]. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Print Quality Settings

170 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Finishing Method

Introduction

The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the finishing method on the control panel.

Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods, for example. Number of staples. Number of punch holes. The location of the staples or punch holes.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or go to a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Binding] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Finishing Method

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 171 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Define the Finishing for Print Jobs

Introduction

The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the finishing method on the control panel.

Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods, for example. Number of staples. Number of punch holes. The location of the staples or punch holes. Folding method. Trimming method.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Binding], [Folding] or [Trimming] button. 5. Make the required settings. 6. Press [OK].

Define the Finishing for Print Jobs

172 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the [Job] Settings

Change the Number of Sets

Introduction

Follow the procedure below to change the number of sets for a job that is present in the list of [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or in a DocBox.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Enter the desired number of sets (between 1 and 65,000).

If necessary, touch the arrow button <- to correct the previous entry, or touch [Cancel] to close the numerical keyboard without saving the changes.

6. Press [OK].

Change the [Job] Settings

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 173 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Check the First Set

Introduction

When you have a large print job and you want to check whether the job is printed correctly, it is advised to check the first set before printing all other sets. When a job is sent to the printer, the submitter can indicate in the job submission application that the first set must be checked. However, the workflow profile that is selected on the control panel determines how the printer handles these requests.

Depending on the selected workflow profile, the [Check first set] setting can have the following values: [On] [Off] [As in job]

When you use the [Check first set] function, the printed set is subtracted from the indicated total number of sets for a job. For example, when you need 10 sets, the printer will print the first set and then stop. When you continue the job, the nine remaining sets are printed. This is different from printing a proof.

Methods to check the first set

You can use one of the following methods to indicate that you want to check the first set. Use a workflow profile where [Check first set] is enabled. Then the printer stops after the first

set. Enable the function [Check first set] in the [Properties] window for a specific job only. However,

you can only change the [Check first set] setting there when a workflow profile is selected where the [Check first set] setting is [As in job].

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Touch [Check first set] when the button states [Off].

The text changes from [Off] to [On]. A check mark indicates that the checking of the first set is enabled.

6. Press [OK]. The [Number of sets] button has a check mark.

7. Press [OK].

Check the First Set

174 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Page Range You Want to Print

Introduction

Usually, in the printer driver is defined whether all pages or only a range of pages must be printed. However, you can also change this setting through the control panel.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Page range] button. 5. Touch [Method] -> [Pages]. 6. Touch the [From] button.

Enter the number of the first page you want to print. 7. Touch the [To] button.

Enter the number of the last page you want to print. 8. Press [OK].

Change the Page Range You Want to Print

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 175 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Use of Separator Sheets

Introduction

Separator sheets are empty sheets that are automatically inserted before each new set or job to separate two sets or jobs. In the Settings Editor you can define the media that must be used as separator sheets. The use of separator sheets can be enabled via the automated workflows in the Settings Editor. However, you can change this setting trough the control panel.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. Touch the [Separator sheets] button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. 5. Press [OK].

Change the Use of Separator Sheets

176 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level

Introduction

You can change settings of a job on page level via the [Page programming] in the job properties.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 4. If you want to carry out extended page programming, touch [Page programming]. 5. Change the required settings. 6. Press [OK].

Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 177 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Automated Workflows

Introduction to Automated Workflows

Definition

The Settings Editor enables you to set up separate automated workflows. Automated workflows are print queues that you can program to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows are mostly used for legacy applications where jobs are printed automatically and certain settings must be set automatically. Every automated workflow represents a different virtual printer with its own specific attributes. The table below describes the attributes you can define.

The selection of automated workflows is handled when the job is sent over LPR via the name of the automated workflow of the job ticket. Once the job is sent to a specified automated workflow on the printer, you cannot move the job to another workflow. The control panel does not display the various automated workflows. However, jobs can get a label that you can use as a selection criterion for further processing and production.

The use of automated workflows has for example the following advantages. The print workflow is automated even more, which improves the productivity. The programming of individual jobs is eliminated, which optimizes the job throughput. You can more easily distinguish, prioritize and produce jobs in different automated workflows

with different properties using less operator involvement. You can easily assign legacy applications without job tickets to specific job profiles.

NOTE You can define whether or not the settings of a job ticket overrule the settings of an automated workflow in the Settings Editor.

Attributes

NOTE It is not mandatory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Attribute Description

[Queue name] You can enter a distinguishing name for the automated workflow (maximum 25 characters). This name is also used as a label on the control panel. This helps the operator to identify certain jobs on the control panel. In this way, the operator can identify from which LPR queue or workflow the job has arrived. Different LPR queues can have the same label if the operator chooses to do so. In that case, the operator cannot distinguish from which specific queue a job has arrived. The LPR queue name is not displayed on the con- trol panel.

[Description] You can enter a description of maximum 200 characters.

[Overrule the job ticket] When this settings is enabled, then the settings of the automated workflow will be used. When this setting is disabled, then the settings of the job ticket will be used.

[Number of copies] You can indicate how many copies of a job must be printed. 4

Automated Workflows

178 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Attribute Description

[Sort] You can indicate whether the jobs must be sorted [By Set] or [By Page].

[Media] You can enter the media that must be used.

[Fit to media] You can indicate whether every page must be scaled to the media size.

[Print sides] You can indicate whether the jobs must be printed one-sided or two-sided.

[Orientation] You can indicate whether the prints must be [Portrait] or [Land- scape].

[Rotate 180 degrees] You can indicate that the prints must be rotated 180 degrees.

[Tumble] You can indicate the orientation of page images on opposite sides of a sheet. When [Tumble] is set to [Yes], the two pages are oriented in such a way that the binding is at the top or bottom. The image is rota- ted 180 degrees on alternate pages. Both sides of the page are printed. However, the position of the image is reversed (from top to bottom) on every other page. When [Tumble] is set to [No], the binding is at the left or right. The images are not rotated on alternate pages.

NOTE [Tumble] is only possible when the setting [Print sides] is set to [2-sided].

[Impositioning] You can indicate how the prints must look, for example [2-up] or [Same 2-up].

[Impositioning size] You can indicate the size of booklet jobs.

[Front or booklet cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the front covers or booklet covers.

[Front cover print on] You can indicate which sides of the front cover must be printed.

[Back cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the back covers.

[Back cover print on] You can indicate which sides of the back cover must be printed.

[Perfect binding] You can indicate where the binding must be done, for example [Left binding] or [Right binding]

[Offset stacking] You can indicate whether each next job or set must be stacked with an offset compared to the previous job or set.

[Staples] You can indicate where the prints must be stapled, for example [Top left] or [Top right].

[Output location] You can indicate where the jobs are sent, for example to the stack- er.

[Sheet order] You can indicate the order in which the sheets will be delivered, for example [Face down - Normal order].

[Feed edge] You can indicate whether the sheets will be fed [Long edge] or [Short edge]. 4

Introduction to Automated Workflows

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 179 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Attribute Description

[Header up/down] You can indicate whether the header of the sheets must be [Head- er-up] or [Header-down].

[Offset stacking] You can indicate whether the prints must be delivered to the out- put location with or without a small shift.

[Value for N sets] You can indicate the number of sets that will be shifted together.

[Punches] You can indicate how many punch holes are required.

[Folding] You can indicate the required folding method.

[Fold to] You can indicate the size in which the media must be folded.

[Trim] You can indicate how the media must be trimmed.

[Trim / target width] You can indicate the width that must be trimmed.

[Trim / target height] You can indicate the height that must be trimmed.

[Contrast] You can indicate the contrast of the print.

[Brightness adjustment] You can indicate whether the print must be darker or lighter.

[Resolution] You can indicate whether the job must be printed on [1200 x 1200 dpi] or [600 x 2400 dpi].

[Halftoning] You can indicate whether the job must be printed [Line 200 LPI], [Dot 200 LPI] or [Dot 125 LPI].

[Fattening] You can indicate whether [Fattening] must be on or off.

[Minimum line width] You can indicate whether the minimum line width must be main- tained, or thinner lines can be printed.

[Enhanced color rendering] You can indicate whether the [Enhanced color rendering] must be on or off.

[Job destination] You can indicate the list to which the job must be sent. For the var- ioPRINT 135 Series, you can select [Waiting jobs], [Scheduled jobs] or [DocBox jobs] (optional).

[DocBox name] You can indicate the name of the DocBox to which the jobs must be sent.

[Printing workflow] You can indicate the type of workflow for the jobs. You can select [Receive, then print while RIP is in progress] or [Streaming].

[PDL type] You can indicate whether PostScript, PCL, PDF or XPS must be used as page description language.

[Separator sheets] [A separator sheet is an empty sheet that is inserted before a set. If 'As in job' is selected, the addition of a separator sheet to the job is as defined in the job. If the job does not specify separator sheet, no separator sheet is added to the job.]

[Account ID] You can indicate the number of the customer that will be used for accounting purposes.

[Cost center] You can indicate [Cost center can be a maximum of 40 characters long.]

[Custom] [Custom can be a maximum of 255 characters long.]

Introduction to Automated Workflows

180 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Add an Automated Workflow

Introduction

The Settings Editor contains one factory default automated workflow. You can add your own specific automated workflows to improve your productivity.

NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Illustration

[41] Add an automated workflow

Procedure

1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Click the [Add] button.

A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for the new workflow. 3. Tick the checkboxes of the attributes you want to define. 4. Specify or select the values of the attributes. 5. Click [Ok].

Add an Automated Workflow

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 181 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Edit an Automated Workflow

Introduction

You can change the attributes of an existing automated workflow.

NOTE It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

Procedure

1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Tick the checkbox of the workflow you want to edit. 3. Click the [Edit] button.

A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for your workflow. 4. Change the attributes. 5. Click [Ok].

Edit an Automated Workflow

182 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Delete an Automated Workflow

Introduction

When you no longer need a certain automated workflow, you can delete that workflow.

NOTE You cannot delete the factory default automated workflow.

Procedure

1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Tick the checkbox of the workflow you want to delete. 3. Click the [Delete] button. 4. Click [Ok].

Delete an Automated Workflow

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 183 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Restore the Factory Default Workflow

Introduction

You can restore the factory default automated workflow. This has the following consequences. All the automated workflows you added will be removed All the changes in the default workflow will be lost.

Procedure

1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows]. 2. Click the [Restore] button.

The factory default automated workflow is restored.

Restore the Factory Default Workflow

184 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Hotfolders

Introduction to Hotfolders

Introduction

Technically, a hotfolder is a mapped network drive on a workstation that is linked to a shared folder on the PRISMAsync controller.

For an operator, a hotfolder is a folder on a workstation where printable files can be dropped for printing.

Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows. In these workflows identical PDFs, or other printable files, with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. Hotfolders should not be used in combination with print job tickets.

The Job Settings for Hotfolders

The settings of a hotfolder can be defined by: A hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder itself, or The automated workflow to which the hotfolder is linked.

It is advisable to use the hotfolder functionality in combination with the hotfolder default ticket.

However, if you want to use the settings of the automated workflow where the hotfolder is linked to, it is advised not to place a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder, to prevent mixing up settings. Furthermore, you must make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket] setting in that automated workflow is enabled (tick the checkbox).

Before You Can Use a Hotfolder

To be able to use the hotfolder function, the following steps must be carried out first: In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function. In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must create a hotfolder and link the hotfolder

to an automated workflow. On a workstation, the key operator must create a shared network drive that is linked to the

hotfolder. On the desktop of that workstation, the key operator can create a shortcut to the hotfolder, if

desired.

Hotfolders

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 185 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Activate the Hotfolder Function

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for system administrators.

NOTE By factory default, the hotfolder function is disabled. To use the hotfolder function, the system administrator must activate this function once. After the system administrator activated the hotfolder function, up to 10 hotfolders can be defined.

NOTE For this procedure, the System administrator password is required.

Procedure

1. Open the web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller. 2. Select [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders]. 3. Click [Configure]. 4. At [Enabled], select [Yes] to activate the hotfolder function. 5. Enter a unique [User name] and [Password].

Make sure that you filled in the user name and password before you continue with the next step. 6. Click [OK] to confirm the activation of the hotfolder function.

A confirmation window opens. 7. Click [OK] to restart the controller now.

Activate the Hotfolder Function

186 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create a Hotfolder

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for system administrator.

Before you begin

The hotfolder function must be activated. Otherwise, the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function first.

Procedure

NOTE This procedure requires the system administrator password for the Settings Editor.

1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller. 2. Select [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders]. 3. Click [Add]. 4. Give the hotfolder a logical name.

A logical name helps you to recognize the type of jobs you want to process using this hotfolder. 5. Select the automated workflow to which you want to link the hotfolder. 6. Click [OK].

Create a Hotfolder

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 187 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation

Introduction

The information in this section is intended for key operators.

Before creating a shared network folder on a workstation, the following actions must be carried out first: Enable the hotfolder function. Create an automated workflow (optional). Create a hotfolder.

NOTE This procedure describes the creation of a shared network folder on a workstation with a Microsoft Windows XP operating system. Depending on the operating system of your workstation, the procedure can be different.

Illustration

[42] Create a shared network drive

Procedure

1. Open Microsoft Explorer. 2. Click Tools -> Map Network Drive... 3. Select a drive letter for the shared network folder. 4. Enter the name of the shared network folder, for example \\12.34.56.78\Booklet, or click the

'Browse' button to navigate to the required location.

NOTE Instead of 12.34.56.78 you must enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller. Booklet is the name you gave to the hotfolder when you created the automated workflow.

5. Click 'Finish'. A log in screen will appear.

6. Enter the user name and the password that were defined when the hotfolder function was enabled in the Settings Editor.

7. Click 'OK.' The hotfolder is now ready for use.

8. If desired, you can create a shortcut to the shared network folder on the desktop of the workstation.

Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation

188 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')

Introduction

Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring PDF workflows. In these workflows identical PDFs, or other printable files, with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. A hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf') in the hotfolder determines the settings for the print jobs. The name of the hotfolder default ticket must not be changed, otherwise it will not be used in the hotfolder.

NOTE If you want to use the hotfolder default ticket, make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket] setting of the automated workflow in which the hotfolder was created, is disabled (no check mark in the checkbox). Otherwise, the settings of the automated workflow overrule the settings of the hotfolder default ticket.

Procedure

NOTE This procedure is an example of the procedure on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system. For other operating systems, the procedure can vary.

1. Click Start - Settings - Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click the printer driver of your printer and select Printing Preferences. 3. Define the required settings. 4. Click the [Save] icon in the Templates bar. 5. Enter a name for the template. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Right-click the template you just created and select 'Save as ticket'. 8. Browse to the shared network folder and click [Save].

The template is saved as a hotfolder default ticket. Do not change the name of the hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf').

Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 189 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Send a job to another printer You can send jobs with their settings to another PRISMAsync printer from the following locations: List of scheduled jobs List of waiting jobs A DocBox List of printed jobs

NOTE When one or more settings or finishing options for the job are not available on the selected remote printer, a warning icon is displayed in the job on the remote printer. The job on the remote printer indicates that there are contradictions you must resolve.

NOTE The list of remote printers must be available and configured in the Settings Editor.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the jobs. 3. Select the jobs you want to send to another printer, or use an option from the [Select] menu to

select multiple jobs together. 4. Select [Copy to] from the button bar or from the drop-down menu. 5. Select a printer from the list or use [Other printer] to manually enter a printer name. 6. Touch [OK].

Send a job to another printer

190 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Transaction Printing (Option)

Introduction to the [Transaction] Section

Introduction

NOTE Transaction printing requires a license. The [System] view on the control panel displays the [Transaction] section only when transaction printing is licensed.

Transaction printing enables you to print typical transactional documents like invoices, salary slips or other variable data streams. Before you can start transaction jobs, you must first activate the transaction mode via the control panel. The [Transaction] section contains the settings that you need to use transaction printing. There you can also shift the image in case of a misalignment.

The following information is described below. An overview of the items in the [Transaction] section on the control panel. The sequence of steps you must perform to print your transaction jobs.

Overview of the [Transaction] Section

1

4

32

[43] Overview of the [Transaction] section

Transaction Printing (Option)

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 191 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Items of the [Transaction] Section

Description of the [Transaction] section

Num ber

Item Function

1 Dashboard The dashboard displays the following information for transaction printing. The connection status The IP address of the host that sends the jobs The name of the active transaction job The progress of the active transaction job

2 [Connection] The [Connection] section gives access to the following functions. Turn the transaction printing mode on or off Select the setup for the transaction jobs

You can define setups in the Settings Editor ([Transac- tion printing] -> [Setups]).

Put the printer online or offline. The printer must be online for the host to be able to connect to the printer.

3 [Print protocol] Display the active printer description language (read-on- ly). You can change the active PDL in the Settings Editor ([Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Requested active PDL]). When the requested active PDL is changed, the new PDL becomes effective when you put the printer online.

4 [Image shift] Display and change the active image shift settings, for example when the images on the front and back of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

Sequence of Steps to Print Transaction Jobs

The following table describes the sequence of steps for transaction printing. Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty before you begin.

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

1 Switch the printer in- to the transaction printing mode.

Via the control panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction print- ing mode] -> [On].

2 Select the active set- up that you need.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Active trans- action setup], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Setups], or

By the host via the data stream (when the printer is online and connected). 4

Introduction to the [Transaction] Section

192 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

3 Change the active PDL when currently the wrong PDL is ac- tive. This is only pos- sible when you have licenses for more than one PDL.

Via the Settings Editor: [Transac- tion printing] -> [Setups] -> [Re- quested active PDL].

4 Load the required media into the paper trays.

Only required when the active set- up has set the tray mode to tray to tray.

5 Put the printer on- line.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] -> [On], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or off- line].

6 Connect to the printer.

7 Submit the transaction print jobs.

8 Print the transaction print jobs.

You must perform all the regular activities, for example load the media, empty the output locations, add the supplies and solve errors.

9 Put the printer off line when the trans- action print jobs are ready.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] -> [Off], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or off- line].

10 Switch the printer back to the docu- ment printing mode.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode] -> [Off].

Introduction to the [Transaction] Section

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 193 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Activate Transaction Printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].

2. If required, touch [Active transaction setup] and select the desired setup. The attributes of the transaction setup are defined in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.

3. Load the required media into the paper trays if the setup selects the tray-to-tray mode. 4. Touch [Transaction online] to put the printer online.

The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On]. 5. On the host or mainframe, connect to the printer and start the job.

NOTE You can also select a setup and put the printer online via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Activate Transaction Printing

194 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Deactivate Transaction Printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] to put the printer offline. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off]. Note that you can only switch the [Transaction online] function to offline when The transaction print jobs are ready. The printer contains no more print data. The printer has stopped because all the jobs are ready, not because an error has occurred.

When you switch [Transaction online] to offline, the connection to the host is disconnected automatically.

2. Press [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].

NOTE You can also put the printer offline via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Deactivate Transaction Printing

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 195 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode

Introduction

When a misalignment occurs, you can shift the image to correct the problem. You can shift the image on the front side and back side horizontally and vertically. Examples of possible misalignments: A name or address is not placed correctly in the right area. Lines on the front side and back side of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

To keep the shift settings for future use, you must specify the shift settings in the setup via the Settings Editor. Each time that the setup is loaded, the shift settings included in the setup will become the active shift settings.

NOTE Only use the image shift function if you want to shift the image of the whole job. The image shift applies to all the media in all the paper trays.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction]. 2. Touch the - or + buttons to shift the image on the front side or back side of the sheet.

Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode

196 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Transaction Setups

Create a New Transaction Setup

Introduction

For transaction printing, transaction setups are required. Transaction setups contain specific settings for specific transaction jobs. You can create setups in the Settings Editor.

NOTE This section describes how to create a transaction setup from scratch. If you want to create a transaction setup that is very similar to an existing setup, you can also create a copy and make changes afterwards. In this case you must select the setup and click [Copy].

Procedure

1. Go to [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Click the [Add] button.

A pop-up window appears. 3. Enter a name and description for the transaction setup, then click [OK]. 4. Check the box next to the setup, then click [Open] to allow changes to the settings of the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you created, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active (see Activate a Transaction Setup on page 199).

Transaction Setups

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 197 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Edit a Transaction Setup

Procedure

1. Select [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Tick the checkbox of the setup you want to edit. 3. If required, click the [Edit] button to change the name or description of the setup, then click [OK]. 4. Click [Open] to allow changes to the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you want to change, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active (see Activate a Transaction Setup on page 199).

Edit a Transaction Setup

198 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Activate a Transaction Setup

Introduction

After you create a new transaction setup or edited an existing transaction setup, you must activate the transaction setup in the Settings Editor. Otherwise, the changes are not applied.

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or offline] to switch the printer offline.

2. Click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups], select the setup and click [Load]. The transaction setup is now activated.

Activate a Transaction Setup

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 199 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Exchange All Setups Between Printers

Introduction

If you have more than one printer, you can exchange the transaction setups between the printers, provided that the printer type and software version are identical. You can then use identical transaction setups on two or more printers.

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups]. 2. Click [Export]. 3. Save the file. 4. To import the setups, click [Import]. 5. Browse to the location where the setup file is stored. 6. Choose either [Replace] or [Merge].

NOTE After you imported the setup file you must open and load the transaction setup you want to use.

Exchange All Setups Between Printers

200 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

IPDS

Media information (IPDS)

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the varioPRINT 135 Series. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Make sure that the [Tray selection mechanism] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Tray to media].

This is the preferred setting. The printer is a media-based machine. The tray-to-media method supports this behavior.

For [IPDS tray to media for tray 1] assign the media catalogue item from the list. The list displays all the media in the media catalog. The system copies the media attributes from the selected media to the transaction setup.

When you assign A3/Tabloid-like media or want to use short-edge feed for other media, change the feed direction to [Short-edge feed (SEF)].

NOTE The Settings Editor displays only the media for which the media name is consistent with the IPDS media name definitions. Valid characters for an IPDS media name are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, blank.

IPDS

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 201 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)

Introduction

The printer is equipped with an efficient, reliable output recovery in case of an error. By factory default, the output recovery is set to [Normal]. After the error is solved, the job continues at the page where the error occurred automatically.

However, some printing environments require that multiple copies must be avoided. For example, in transactions involving the printing of valuable documents such as cheques. In such an environment, the [Output recovery] setting of your IPDS setup must be set to [Suppressed].

When the output recovery is suppressed, the printer will not automatically make sure that the output is corrected after a recovery. All pending pages in the printer will be deleted and the stack will be ejected. The host system and the operator are responsible for the recovery. The operator must restart the job manually on the correct page.

The tables below describe what happens when either the normal output recovery or the suppressed output recovery is selected.

Normal Output Recovery in IPDS

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully.

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Remain in controller memory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the con- troller memory. 4

Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)

202 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The control panel dis- plays instructions on how to solve the pa- per jam. The operator has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets stay in the memory of the controller. Once the printer resumes print- ing, these pages will be printed again.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

These sheets stay in the host memory. When the printer starts printing, these pages will be copied and sent to the con- troller.

Suppressed Output Recovery in IPDS

Pages that are copied to the memory of the controller are deleted from the system. The operator must send these missing pages as a new transaction print job to the printer.

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location 4

Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 203 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Are deleted complete- ly.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The control panel dis- plays instructions on how to solve the pa- per jam. The operator has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the host memory.

Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)

204 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

PCL

Media Messages (PCL)

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the varioPRINT 135 Series. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Response to Media Messages

For transaction printing, the content of the paper trays (in terms of media from the media catalog) is translated into a format that the controller understands. However, the controller receives only a limited amount of information (name or size of the media). This can lead to miscommunication where the controller misses a media requirement. Then the controller will ask for the required media via a message on the control panel. This [Media message] indicates the name or size of the missing media.

Your response to the [Media message] depends on the mode in which the printer works, either: The tray-to-tray mode, or The tray-to-media mode.

PCL

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 205 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Press [Assign media].

Continue with step 2 when you select this option. Press [Continue]. Press [Cancel stream].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that must be used as the media the controller is asking for, and touch [OK]. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select one of the 16 memory locations of the logical-tray table to be used for the required media. Note that the media that was previously allocated to that memory position in the setup will be overwritten. Then that media will no longer be available to the transaction stream. Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)

206 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Press [Assign media].

Continue with step two when you select this option. Press [Continue]. Press [Cancel stream].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps two and three apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that will be used as the media the controller is asking for and touch [OK]. The media will now be displayed with the name that is defined in the media catalog. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select the paper tray where you want to load the required media and touch [OK]. 4. Load the media. 5. Close the paper tray. 6. Press [OK].

Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs 207 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)

208 Chapter 6 - Carry Out Print Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 7 Carry Out Copy Jobs

The Copy Function

Introduction to the Copy Function

Introduction

The copy function enables you to copy paper originals. You can define the settings of the copy jobs manually or by using templates. Templates contain predefined settings for recurring types of copy jobs.

The copy function contains a number of factory default templates, for example for copying mixed-size originals or combining several sets of originals. Furthermore, you can define customized templates. The factory default templates are directly available when you access the copy function. When you select one of these templates, the system sets the typical settings for the selected type of copy job automatically. Next you can define all other settings for the originals and the output.

The illustration and the table below show the factory default templates you can use to start a copy job.

Illustration

[44] Start a copy job

The Copy Function

210 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Factory Default Templates

Overview of the templates

Template When to use

[Copy job] Copy originals that have the same media size and only require simple settings, for example two-sided or a staple.

[Combined copy job] Combine several sets of originals with the same or mixed media size, and create one single copy job. When you select this template, the possibility to add subsets is al- ready displayed.

[To DocBox]

NOTE [To DocBox]is only visible when your system is equipped with the optional Doc- Box function.

Send the job to the DocBox to get extended possibilities to pro- grammed each page separately. When you select this template, the destination of the copy job is set to the first available DocBox. The destination is always set to this DocBox, even when a different copy job destination has been defined for the active workflow profile. However, you can change the DocBox to which the job must be sent.

[Booklet job] Create booklets from paper originals. When you select this template: The [Layout] setting is set to [Booklet], and The [Media] setting is set to A3/Tabloid, because the system as-

sumes you want to create booklets of A4/LTR originals.

[Last used] Reuse the settings of the previous copy job for your new copy job.

NOTE You cannot use [Last used] when the previous job was a scan job or a combined copy job.

[Mixed size] Copy a set of originals that consists of different media sizes. The output will also consist of these different media sizes.

Introduction to the Copy Function

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 211 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scanning Information

Introduction

You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in the top left corner) or the back edge of the ADF.

The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned.

The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a non-standard paper size, such as a book. In this case, specify the size of the original.

Orientation on the Glass Plate

When you put an original on the glass plate, always put the original face down on the glass plate.

NOTE If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly.

Placement on the glass plate

Placement Illustration

Vertical placement

Horizontal placement

Orientation in the ADF

Placement in the ADF

Placement Illustration

Vertical placement

4

Scanning Information

212 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Placement Illustration

Horizontal placement

Placement of the Originals

You can place originals of the following sizes either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that of vertically placed originals. Place originals horizontally when you copy with a preset zoom, for example when you enlarge an A4 original to A3 paper.

NOTE You must always place A3, B4, B6 and 11" x 17" originals horizontally.

Scanning Information

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 213 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Copy or Scan Originals Using the Glass Plate

Introduction

Use the glass plate to copy or scan bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies. Also place originals on the glass plate when you want to copy an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off.

CAUTION Do not press down hard on the ADF when you use the glass plate to copy thick books. Doing so may damage the glass plate and result in personal injury.

NOTE The scanner automatically detects the following sizes of originals (after you closed the ADF): A5, Statement 5.5"x8.5", B5, A4, A4R, Letter 8.5"x11", LetterR, B4R, B5R, LegalR 8.5"x14", A3R, TabloidR 11"x17", B6.

Copy originals on the glass plate

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the ADF.

NOTE Open the ADF at least 300 mm (11.8"). Otherwise, the size of the originals may not be detec- ted correctly.

Sensor

Sensor = Sensor

2 Place one original face down on the glass plate.

4

Copy or Scan Originals Using the Glass Plate

214 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

3 Align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in the upper-left corner).

NOTE When you enlarge an A4 or A5 original onto A3 paper, place the original horizontally on the glass plate, and align it with the A4R or A5R marks.

NOTE When you enlarge a Letter or Statement original onto 11"x17" or Legal paper, place the origi- nal horizontally on the glass plate, and align it with the Let- terR or StatementR marks.

4 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal injury or damage to the scanner.

5 Define the copy or scan settings on the control panel and touch [Start] .

6 When the copy or scan job is ready, open the ADF and remove the original from the glass plate.

7 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal injury or damage to the scanner.

Copy or Scan Originals Using the Glass Plate

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 215 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF

Introduction

Use the ADF to copy or scan a set of up to 300 originals. The scanner automatically feeds the originals to the glass plate and scans them. Two-sided originals can be scanned as two-sided documents.

Do not place the following types of originals into the ADF: Thin originals, when the scanner is located in an environment with high temperatures or high

humidity. Torn originals or originals with large binding holes. Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds. Clipped or stapled originals. Carbon backed paper. Transparencies and other highly transparent originals. Any other originals which may not feed smoothly.

NOTE Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the ADF.

Copy originals in the ADF

Step Action Illustration

1 Adjust the paper guides to fit the size of your originals.

2 Neatly place your originals with the side to be copied face up into the originals tray. Place your originals as far into the ADF as possible until the originals indicator is lit.

3 Define the copy or scan settings on the control panel, and touch [Start] .

4 When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to avoid paper jams.

Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF

216 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job

Introduction

When you access the copy function or scan function from the [Copy/Scan] view, the job window opens in full screen mode. Therefore, the buttons that give access to the other system functions are not visible. However, you can access the other functions while you define the settings for your copy job or scan job.

NOTE The machine will remember all the job settings you already defined.

Procedure

1. In the job window on the control panel, touch [Minimize]. The [Copy/Scan] view appears. The navigation buttons at the bottom of the control panel become visible and accessible.

2. Carry out the desired actions. 3. To get back to your job window, touch [Jobs]. 4. Press [Resume job].

Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 217 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Copy Your Documents

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Introduction

When you make a copy, you can define the following. How the originals look. How the output must look. Generic settings for the whole job.

To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of logical settings for the [Original] and the [Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The automated settings have the prefix [Auto].

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[45] The copy job settings

Section Description

1 [Original] The [Original] section contains the settings to define how the original looks. 4

Copy Your Documents

218 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Section Description

2 [Output] The [Output] section contains the settings available to define how the resulting copy must look.

NOTE All the settings have a fixed position. If a set- ting is not possible, then the location of that setting is empty. Example: The [Trimming] set- ting is only be available when you have a trim- mer. Otherwise, the location of the [Trimming] setting is empty.

3 [Job] The [Job] section enables you to define generic proper- ties for the whole job.

4 Preview The preview section shows the result of the settings de- fined for the output.

5 Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select actions, for example, save settings to a template, cancel a job, or start scanning. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and finishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

[Original] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] The automatically set value for this setting.

[1-sided]

Only the front side contains an image or text.

[2-sided]

Both the front side and the back side contain an im- age or text.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 219 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Original] Settings - [Original type]

Setting Values Description

[Original type] The automatically set value for this setting.

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the left- hand side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

[Original] Settings - [Size]

Setting Values Description

[Size]

A4, A3, Letter, Tabloid, etc.

Original in the ADF or on the glass plate: Automatic size detection, or Enter the media format of the original.

When your original has a non-standard size, you can use the - and + buttons to enter the exact measures. You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of the[Size] button changes into [Custom].

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

Automatic orientation detection, or Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size media

Description of the Copy Job Settings

220 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Original] Settings - [Image type]

Setting Values Description

[Image type]

[Mixed]

The original contains a combination of text and im- ages.

[Photo]

The original contains mainly or only images.

[Text]

The original contains mainly or only text.

[High detail]

The original contains an image with lots of details.

[Output] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[Auto]

The automatically set value for this setting.

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on one side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 221 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Binding edge]

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge]

[Auto]

The automatically set value for this setting.

[Portrait left]

The output has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The output has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge of the print is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge

the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a two-sided print is upside down compared to the front side.

[Landscape left]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the print is on the left side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the text or image is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The output has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the print is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image on the back side of the sheet is in readable form. This means that every back side of a two-sided print is upside down compared to the front side.

[Output] Settings - [Media]

Setting Values Description

[Media] Names of the media in the media cata- logue

Here you can select the media for the copy job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalogue. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

222 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Cover]

Setting Values Description

[Cover]

[Front]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a front cover. When the setting is enabled the corre- sponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Front cover] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalogue.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the front cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back cover]

Here you can indicate that the print job requires a back cover. When the setting is enabled the corre- sponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.

[Media] When the setting [Back cover] is enabled, you can select a media from the media catalogue.

[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the back cover you want to print on. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 223 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Layout]

Setting Values Description

[Layout]

[Normal]

The machine prints the pages with no special lay- out settings.

[Booklet]

The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The pages one and four are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages two and three are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. When you copy A4/LTR originals with the setting [Same up] and [Images per sheet] is two, the ma- chine will automatically print the job on A3 / 11" x 17", for example. When you cut the A3 / 11"x 17" sheets in two, you get two identical A4 / LTR cop- ies of your document. To reduce your A4/LTR orig- inals to A5/STMT prints, you can use the zoom function or select another media type.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints multiple consecutive images on one side of a sheet, next to each other.

[Same-up flipped]

The machine prints the same image twice on one side of a sheet, but one image is upside down compared to the other.

[Images per sheet] Here, you can select the number of images you want to print when you select [Same up] or [Multi- ple up].

[Output] Settings - [Zoom]

Setting Values Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so it fits onto the page. When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the image is maintained.

[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview pane immediately shows the results of your ac- tion.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

224 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Auto]

The automatically set value for this setting.

[Top left]

The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the posi- tion of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right cor- ner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 225 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Shift]

Setting Values Description

[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the mar- gin. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the val- ues for the front side and the back side remain identical. Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output, for example. Narrow- ing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the out- put, for example. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked sta- tus. Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side re- main identical. If you want to define a different value for each side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked sta- tus. Now you can define the values for the front side and the back side separately.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

226 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Print delivery]

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 1

[Output loca- tion]

Select the output location for the job. Depending on the set- tings for your copy job, the machine automatically suggests the preferred output location for your job. However, you can manually overrule this suggestion. [Stacker/stapler upper tray]

Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stacker/stapler. [Stacker/stapler lower tray]

Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stacker/stapler. [Stacker/stapler booklet tray]

Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stacker/stapler. [Folder main tray]

Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the folder.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stack- ing]

This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] set- ting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in the workflow profile.

[Each set] Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to rec- ognize individual sets.

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output location are stacked in a straight stack. 4

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 227 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 2

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top. 4

Description of the Copy Job Settings

228 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 3

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in land- scape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Print order]

[Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Advanced set- tings] -> [Rota- tion]

[0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Output] Settings - [Margin erase]

Setting Values Description

[Margin erase]

[Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these elements on the copy. With the + and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can define how much margin of the original you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 229 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Output] Settings - [Exposure]

Setting Values Description

[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark areas on the print separately. When an area on the output must be darker,

then select a value of -1 to -3. When the area must be lighter, then select a val-

ue of 1 to 3.

[Light] When the area must be darker, then select a val- ue of -1 to -3.

When an area on the output must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.

[Output] Settings - [Binding]

Setting Values Description

[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta- ples. Furthermore you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for one staple: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for two staples: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitching]

[Output] Settings - [Folding]

This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

230 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Folding]

[None]

[Z-fold]

Required output location for Z-folded A4R, LetterR and Legal: Folder output tray, or Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.

NOTE Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17" sheets must be sent to the stacker/ stapler.

[Z-fold large sheets only]

Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the stacker/ stapler.

[Tri-fold in]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Tri-fold out]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Parallel fold]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on which side to print: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[Output] Settings - [Trimming]

This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 231 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.

[Trim size]

You can indicate the amount of trimming at the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to 20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")

[Finishing size]

You can indicate the size of the resulting docu- ment after trimming. You can either touch [Size] to select a default media size or manual- ly define the width and length of the docu- ment. When you define a non-standard media size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].

[Output] Settings - [Punching]

This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.

Setting Values Description

[Punching]

[None]

Here you can select the required number and the location of the punch holes. Location: [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set dependent]

Description of the Copy Job Settings

232 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Number of sets]

Setting Values Description

[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled, the printer stops after the first set of a job has been printed. You can check the quality of the output.

NOTE This setting is only available when in the workflow profile [Check first set] is set to [As in job].

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job you need. You can enter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

Job name

Setting Values Description

[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change the name of the job. When you touch the [Job name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can change the name of the job.

[46] Change the job name

Description of the Copy Job Settings

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 233 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Destination]

Setting Values Description

[Destination] [Scheduled jobs] Add the copy job to the list of [Scheduled jobs] in the [Jobs] view.

[Waiting jobs] Add the copy job to the list or [Waiting jobs] in the [Jobs] view.

[DocBox] Add the copy job to the [DocBox] (if licensed).

[Separator sheets]

Setting Values Description

[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is enabled, a separate sheet is inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear distinction be- tween two sets. Separator sheets are always emp- ty. In the Settings Editor, select a media from the media catalog use as separator sheets. You can al- so indicate the feed direction of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.

Description of the Copy Job Settings

234 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Make a Basic Copy

Introduction

A basic copy is a copy for which you only define a few settings before touching the Start button , such as:

One-sided or two-sided A staple The number of copies required.

Before you begin

Remove staples or paper clips. Make sure that the automatic document feeder (ADF) contains maximum 300 sheets (80 g/m

or 20 lb bond). Make sure that the originals are not curled.

Illustration

[47] Make a basic copy

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. If required, define the settings and the required number of copies. 4. Select [Scheduled jobs] in the [Destination] field to start copying immediately. 5. Press .

The job is added to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

Make a Basic Copy

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 235 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

Introduction

When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 2. Select an existing copy or scan job template. 3. Make the required settings for the recurring job. 4. Touch [Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template. 5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK]. 6. Press [Cancel].

The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.

You can now select the following options. [Rename]. [Move].

Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location. The location of the [Last used] template is set.

[Delete]

NOTE Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a template.

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

236 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Copy Non-Standard Size Originals

Introduction

The scanner can detect the following media sizes automatically:

Glass plate ADF

A3R A4 A4R A5 B4R B5 B5R B6 Statement 5.5" x8.5" Letter 8.5" x 11" LetterR 11"x 8.5" LegalR 8.5" x14" TabloidR 11" x 17"

A3R A4 A4R A5 A5R B4R B5 B5R B6R Statement 5.5" x 8.5" StatementR Letter 8.5" x 11" LetterR 11" x 8.5" LegalR 8.5" x 14" TabloidR 11" x 17"

When you copy originals with a different size, you must enter the correct measures manually.

The ADF supports originals of 140 mm x 128 mm - 630 mm x 304.8 mm (5.5"x 5" - 24.9" x 12").

The glass plate supports originals of 10 mm x 10 mm - 432 mm x 297mm (0.4" x 0.4" - 17" x 11.7").

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. In the [Original] section, touch [Size]. 4. Use the - and + buttons to enter the correct media size. 5. Press [OK].

The [Size] button displays the defined size. 6. In the [Output] section, touch [Media]. 7. Select a media from the list and touch [OK].

The setting [Zoom] determines how the copy will look. When [Zoom] ->[Fit to page] is enabled, the original will be scaled to fit the media size of the output. When [Zoom] -> [Fit to page] is disabled, you can enter a custom zoom percentage.

Copy Non-Standard Size Originals

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 237 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Zoom Behavior

Introduction

When you carry out a copy job or scan job, you can use the [Zoom] function to reduce or enlarge an image, for example: Copy an A4 original on an A3 sheet. The system enlarges the image. Copy an A3 original on an A4 sheet. The system reduces the image. Copy an A4 original with a small illustration on an A4 sheet, and at the same time enlarge the

illustration.

By factory default, the [Zoom] function is set to [Fit to page]. To change the zoom factor manually, touch the - and + buttons of the [Zoom] function.

The zoom function for originals in the automatic document feeder is different from the zoom function for originals on the glass plate.

Zoom behavior

Original Starting point of the zoom function

Automatic document feeder Center

Glass plate Upper left-hand corner

NOTE The zoom function works identical for both copy jobs and scan jobs.

How to Use the Zoom Function for a Scan from the ADF

The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the automatic document feeder. The focus is on the centre of the original.

Scan from the automatic document feeder using the zoom function

Illustration Description

The original is placed face-down and in readable form into the au- tomatic document feeder. The center of the original is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image.

Result of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.

Result of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.

NOTE The center of the image is fixed.

Result of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.

NOTE The center of the image is fixed.

The Zoom Behavior

238 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

How to Use the Zoom Function for a Scan from the Glass Plate

The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned from the glass plate. The focus is on the upper right-hand corner of the original (upper left-hand corner of the glass plate).

Scan from the glass plate using the zoom function

Illustration Description

The original is placed face-down and in readable form in the upper left-hand corner on the glass plate. The upper left-hand corner of the glass plate is a fixed point and is used as the origin of the image.

Result on paper of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.

Result on paper of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.

NOTE The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.

Result on paper of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.

NOTE The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.

The Zoom Behavior

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 239 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output

NOTE When you make one copy of one original, stapling is not possible.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job]. 3. At the [Binding] setting, select the required number of staples and the location of the staples. 4. At the [Punching] setting, select the required number of holes. 5. At the [Folding] setting, select the folding method. 6. At the [Trimming] setting, define the trim settings 7. If required, define the other settings for the original document and the output. 8. Enter the generic values in the [Job] section. 9. Touch [Start] .

Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output

240 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Rename a Copy Job

Introduction

When you carry out a new copy job, the system creates an automatic name for the job. The default name 'Copy Job' followed by a sequence number is displayed in the [Job name] field. However, you can rename the copy job into a name of your choice. This name helps you to recognize the job in the list of [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox] (optional).

Procedure

1. In the job window on the control panel, touch [Job name]. A keyboard appears.

2. Touch and hold 'Backspace' until the current name is deleted. 3. Enter a new name. 4. Press [OK].

Rename a Copy Job

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 241 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Combining subsets into one document

Introduction

You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.

Procedure

1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job]. 3. Define the subset settings for both in the [Original] and [Output].

NOTE Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and [Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after scanning the first subset.

4. Press [Scan]. 5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all subsequent subsets.

A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.

NOTE When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.

7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed. A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can add, insert, delete or edit subsets.

8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media and finishing settings per page range.

9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function. 10. Press .

Combining subsets into one document

242 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document

Introduction

If you want to use tab sheets to create a physical division in your document, you must treat the copy job as a combined copy job. The tab sheets will be processed as inserts.

Before you begin

Make sure that you split up your original document into the parts (subsets) that must be preceded by tab sheets.

Make sure that you load the required tab sheets into a paper tray or into the optional inserter module.

Illustration

[48] Insert tab sheets

Procedure

1. Place the first subset face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job]. 3. Define the settings for the subset (both in the [Original] and [Output] section). 4. Press . 5. Place the next subset face up into the ADF, or face down on the glass plate. 6. Repeat the steps three and four for all subsequent subsets. 7. Touch [Ready] when all subsets were scanned. 8. Press [Edit].

A preview pane displays the scanned subsets. 9. Touch the subset before which you want to insert the first tab sheet.

Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 243 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The selected subset is highlighted. 10. Press [Insert]. 11. In the settings pane, touch [Media] and select a tab media. 12. Press . 13. Press [Ready]. 14. Press [Edit]. 15. Repeat the steps nine to fourteen until all the tab sheets were inserted. 16. Touch [Ready] when all the tab sheets were inserted. 17. Define the general job settings such as [Number of sets]. 18. Press .

Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document

244 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan Now and Print Later

Introduction

You can scan an original document now and print the document later (postponed copying). To use this function, you must send a copy job to the list of [Waiting jobs] or to the [DocBox] (optional).

When to do

You must only change the destination to [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox] (optional) when the default destination of copy jobs is [Scheduled jobs]. The default destination of copy jobs is defined in the workflow profiles.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job] or [Combined copy job]. 3. Define the settings for your copy job. 4. Touch [Destination] to select [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox] (optional). 5. If required, touch [Job name] to rename the job. This helps you to recognize the job more easily. 6. Touch [Start] .

The job is sent to the selected destination. There you can select the job whenever you want to print it.

Scan Now and Print Later

Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 245 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan Now and Print Later

246 Chapter 7 - Carry Out Copy Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 8 Carry Out Scan Jobs

Configure the Scan Function

Introduction to the Scan Function

Definition

The scan function enables you to create digital documents from paper originals. You can scan paper originals from the automatic document feeder (ADF) and from the glass plate of the scanner.

Scan Types and Output Locations

NOTE The scan function requires a software license. If you have a license, scan to file, scan to SMB, scan to email and scan to USB are available. Scan to DocBox requires an additional software license for the DocBox function.

Scan types and output locations

Scan type Output location

Scan to file FTP server

Scan to SMB SMB server

Scan to email SMTP server. The file is attached to an email message.

Scan to USB USB flash drive

Scan to DocBox PRISMAsync controller

Condition

The customer must have a fully configured FTP, SMB and SMTP server available. The settings in the Settings Editor are used to connect the printer to the customer's FTP, SMB and SMTP server.

Configuration

To use the scan-to-file, scan-to-SMB and scan-to-email functions, the following items must be configured in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller. Scan to file ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]) Scan to SMB ([Workflow] -> [SMB shares]) Scan to email ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]) LDAP server ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]), if available. Otherwise, you can use an address

list file (ral.csv) to search for recipients. A scan profiles file (sjt.csv) in which the scan-to-email and scan-to-file templates are defined

([Workflow] -> [Scan profiles]).

Configure the Scan Function

248 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[49] The Copy/Scan view on the control panel

Usage

You can use the scan-to-email, scan-to-file and scan-to-SMB templates through the [Copy/Scan] section on the control panel ([Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. To scan a document, select the required template. Next, the job window opens. There you can change a number of settings for this scan job. However, these changes are only valid for this job. The default settings of the scan template will not change.

The scan-to-USB function is accessible through the USB button in the [Jobs] section on the control panel. The left-hand side of the control panel contains the slot for the USB flash drive.

The scan-to-DocBox function is accessible through the [To DocBox] tile in the [Copy/Scan] section.

Removal of Scan Jobs

The PRISMAsync controller buffers the scan jobs until the jobs are delivered to the specified output location. You can remove scan jobs from the buffer manually or automatically. Manually via the printer control panel: Touch [Jobs] -> list of [Scan jobs] -> select a scan job ->

touch [Delete]. Manually via the Settings Editor: Access the Settings Editor -> click [Support] ->

[Troubleshooting] -> [Clean the scan job export buffer]. Automatically: The PRISMAsync controller removes a buffered scan job automatically 48 hours

after a scan job has finished.

Introduction to the Scan Function

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 249 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Configure the Settings for Scan to File

Introduction

To use the scan-to-file function, the system administrator must configure the function in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will be sent to the FTP server configured.

How to Configure the Settings for Scan to File

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for scan to file in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-file func- tion is configured correctly.

[Scan to file, scan to email and scan to SMB enabled]

This setting must be set to [Yes] to use the scan func- tion.

[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the FTP server that receives the scan jobs.

[Port] The TCP port number of the FTP server. The default val- ue is 21.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the FTP server when sending scan jobs.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Destination directory] The directory on the FTP server to which the scan jobs will be sent.

Configure the Settings for Scan to File

250 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB

Introduction

To use the scan-to-SMB function, the system administrator must enable this function in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). The system administrator must add SMB shares ([Workflow] -> [SMB shares]). The maximum number of SMB shares is 3. A scan job will be sent to the selected SMB share.

How to Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for scan to SMB in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Scan to file, scan to email and scan to SMB enabled]

This setting must be set to [Yes] to use the scan func- tion.

[Name] The name of the SMB share.

[Description] The description of the SMB share.

[Network destination] Select [Domain] or [Workgroup].

[Domain name] Name of the domain.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the SMB server when sending scan jobs.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Path] The directory on the SMB server to which the scan jobs will be sent.

Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 251 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Configure the Settings for Scan to Email

Introduction

To use the scan-to-email function, the system administrator must configure the function in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will be sent as an attachment to the email address defined.

How to Configure the Settings for Scan to Email

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for scan to email in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-email func- tion is configured correctly.

[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the SMTP server that handles the emails containing the scan jobs.

[Port] The TCP port number of the SMTP server. The default value is 25.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the SMTP server when sending scan jobs.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Sender] The name that will be displayed as the sender of the email that contains the scan job.

[Maximum attachment size] The maximum size allowed for the attached scan job in MB. You can enter a value from 0 - 2147483647 in steps of one. The value '0' means unlimited. The default value is 5 MB.

[Allow scanning to multiple email ad- dresses]

When enabled you can send the scan job to one or more email addresses. You must enter the email address on the control panel. Separate the email addresses with ';'.

Configure the Settings for Scan to Email

252 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server

Introduction

If the scan-to-email function is enabled, a list of user codes and matching email addresses is required. When a user enters his/her unique code on the control panel, the scan job will be sent to the matching email address.

The list of user codes and matching email addresses can be available at the following places: On an LDAP server, if available If an LDAP server is unavailable, in an address list file (default name: ral.csv), which must be

uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller through the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]).

When a user enters the user code, the system will first look for a matching email address in the LDAP database. When the system does not find a matching email address there, or when an LDAP server is not available, the system will search the address list file (ral.csv) for the matching email address.

How to Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server

The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the Settings Editor.

Settings for LDAP in the Settings Editor

Setting Description

[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the connection to the LDAP server works correctly.

[Enabled] This setting must be set to [Yes] to realize a connection between the printer and the LDAP server.

[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the LDAP server where user information for scan to email can be retrieved.

[Port] The TCP port number of the LDAP server. The default value is 389.

[User name] The user name that is used to access the LDAP server.

[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.

[Search database] The path to the LDAP directory that contains the user identifiers, for example o=YourOrganization.

[User identification] The type of user identification that must be searched for, for example a telephone number or employee ID.

[Email address attribute] The LDAP attribute that contains the email address of the user, for example 'mail'.

Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 253 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the Address List File (ral.csv)

Introduction

If an LDAP server is not available, you must use a remote address list file (ral.csv) for scan to email. This file must contain the unique user codes and matching email addresses. The PRISMAsync controller stores the address list file. Proceed as follows: 1. Download the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the

[LDAP] section -> [Download address list file]). 2. Edit the file in Microsoft Excel, for example. 3. Upload the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the

[LDAP] section -> [Upload address list file]).

Syntax of the Address List File

The address list file must contain a header line (mandatory) and at least one line with an email recipient.

A "," or ";" separates the items in a record.

or separates records.

The header record shows the fields that the address list uses (ruid,address,comment).

A profile record contains the unique user codes and matching email addresses. ruid and address are mandatory. comment is optional.

Record Items

Record items

Record item Description

ruid A unique user code, for example an employee number or tele- phone number. Maximum 20 digits. Leading zeros are allowed.

address The email address that matches the user code. Maximum 40 characters. Do not use the characters , , "," and ";".

comments Additional information, if required.

NOTE Do not change the header information.

Examples of Correct Profiles

01234,userA@companyX.com 56789,userB@organizationY.com

Use the Address List File (ral.csv)

254 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

Introduction

When the scan function is licensed, the [Copy/Scan] section on the printer operator panel displays templates that give access to copy and scan functions. The copy templates are factory default templates. To use scan templates, you must first create scan-to-file and scan-to-email profiles in the scan profiles file (sjt.csv) on the PRISMAsync controller. Proceed as follows: 1. Download the file via the Settings Editor ([Workflow] -> [Scan profiles] -> [Download scan

profiles]). 2. Edit the file in Microsoft Excel, for example. 3. Upload the file via the Settings Editor ([Workflow] -> [Scan profiles] -> [Upload scan profiles]).

Each scan profile consists of a combination of individual settings for specific scan jobs, either scan to file or scan to email. The display name you define for a scan profile is shown in the [Copy/ Scan] section on the control panel.

NOTE In the scan profiles file, you can define a maximum of 99 scan profiles.

Syntax of the Scan Profiles File

The scan profiles file must contain a header line (mandatory) and at least one line with a scan profile.

A "," or ";" separates the items in a record.

or separates records.

The header record shows the items that the scan profile uses (dispname,format,ilc,prefix,minnr,maxnr,name_nr_title,cfname,subfolder,postfix,OrigOrientation, OrigDuplex,OrigKind,OrigZoom,OrigFormat,DestFormat,DestQual,DestColor).

A profile record contains the unique settings for various scan job types. dispname,format,ilc,prefix,minnr,maxnr,name_nr_title and cfname are mandatory. The other record items are optional.

NOTE When you leave optional items empty, the system defines the settings automatically. However, you can change a number of settings via the control panel.

Record Items

Record items

Record item Description

dispname (display name)

The unique name of the scan profile that is displayed in the [Copy/Scan] sec- tion on the control panel. Minimum 1 and maximum 40 characters. Do not use , ; . 4

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 255 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Record item Description

format (file format)

The file format and compression used for the resulting scan file. TIFF G31D_MH

Multi-page TIFF CCITT Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed images TIFF G42D_Fax

Multi-page TIFF CCITT.T6 Group 4 2D compressed images TIFF LZW

Multi-page TIFF LZW compressed images SINGLE TIFF G31D_MH

Single-page TIFF CCITT Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed im- ages

SINGLE TIFF G42D_Fax Single-page TIFF CCITT.T6 Group 4 2D compressed images

SINGLE TIFF LZW Single-page TIFF LZW compressed images

PDF G31 D_MH PDF version 1.3 with Group 3 1D modified Huffman compressed images

PDF G42D_Fax PDF version 1.3 with Group 4 2D compressed images.

PDF LZW PDF version 1.3 with LZW compressed images

PDF JPG PDF with JPEG compressed images

JPG JPEG

ilc (Image Logic

characteristics)

The best scan result for a specific purpose. 1

600 dpi. Optimized for printing on Copy Press systems. 2

300 dpi. Optimized for viewing and archiving. 3

600 dpi at 85 lpi. Optimized for printing on Demand Stream and other B&W systems.

4 600 dpi at 106 lpi. Optimized for printing on Demand Stream and other B&W systems.

5 200 dpi

6 150 dpi

7 100 dpi

8 75 dpi

prefix (file name prefix)

The prefix can specify the application, for example archive or email. The pre- fix is a fixed part of the file name. When you create a scan-to-email profile, you must use the prefix email. Maximum eight characters. Use a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _. 4

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

256 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Record item Description

minnr (minimum num- ber of digits)

The minimum number of digits a user must enter when the scan profile is selected in the [Copy/Scan] section. The digits entered are stored in the file name. Minimum 0, maximum 20 digits.

maxnr (maximum num- ber of digits)

The maximum number of digits a user must enter when the scan profile is selected in the [Copy/Scan] section. The digits entered are stored in the file name. Minimum 0, maximum 20 digits.

NOTE When minnr and maxnr are both 0, the system will not ask for a user code.

name_nr_title (dialogue title)

The title of the dialogue that appears when the user must enter a code to use the scan profile, as defined in and . The title must ex- plain to the user which number is required. Maximum 40 characters. Do not use , ; .

cfname (file name feed- back)

Activate an additional dialogue on the control panel after starting a new scan job to write down the generated file name. The control panel displays the dialogue title that is defined in name_nr_title. y: show the additional dialogue. n: do not show the additional dialogue.

subfolder (subfolder on scan server)

The path to a subfolder on the scan server where the files are stored. Maximum 150 characters. Do not use * ? : < > | .

postfix (file name post- fix)

Add a postfix to the file name. For example, when the prefix is 'email', you can add an email address as a postfix. Maximum 30 characters. Do not use / \ : * ? " < > | . 4

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 257 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Record item Description

OrigOrientation (orientation of the originals)

The default orientation and binding of the originals on the scanner. portrait book portrait calendar landscape book landscape calendar

[50] portrait book

[51] portrait calendar

[52] landscape book

[53] landscape calendar

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

OrigDuplex (number of sides of the originals that will be scan- ned)

The number of sides of the originals on the scanner that will be scanned. on

The originals are scanned 2-sided off

The originals are scanned 1-sided

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

OrigKind (type of originals)

The image type of the originals. photo

The originals contain (mainly) photos or illustrations. text

The originals contain (mainly) text. auto

The system chooses the best settings automatically. mixed

The originals contain a mixture of photos and texts.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

OrigZoom (zoom of the originals)

The percentage by which the originals on the scanner will be increased or decreased. Any value from 25 to 400. When this item remains empty, the value is 100. Then the originals and the output have the same size.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel. 4

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

258 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Record item Description

OrigFormat (paper size and feed direction of the originals)

The paper size and feed direction of the originals on the scanner, for exam- ple A4 lef. Paper sizes: A5 Statement 5.5x8.5 B5 Letter 8.5x11 A4 Foolscap Folio Legal 8.5x14 B4 A3 US Gov 8x10.5 Tabloid 11x17 Commercial Letter Gov 8.5x10 Legal Gov 8.5x12 Letter 8.25x10 Legal 8.5x13

Feed directions: sef (short-edge feed) lef (long-edge feed).

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

DestFormat (paper size of the output)

The paper size of the resulting scan file. Select a paper size from the list de- scribed in . You cannot select a feed direction.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

DestQuality (quality of the output)

Define the quality as a percentage. This item is used for file types which sup- port loss compression, JPG for example. For other file types, it is ignored. Any value from 1 to 100.

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

DestColor (type of color of the output)

Define the color mode of the resulting scan file, either color, grayscale or black & white. color grayscale blackAndwhite

NOTE You can overrule this setting on the control panel.

NOTE Do not change the header information.

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 259 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Examples of Correct Profiles

PDF printing,PDF G31D_MH,2,scanjob,0,0,,n,,,,,,,,,, Scan to email,PDF G31D_MH,1,email,5,5,Enter your employee number.,y,,,,,,,, PRISMAaccess,PDF G31D_MH,1,Scanjob,0,0,,n,ScanLogic,,,,,,,

Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv)

260 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan Your Documents

Description of the Scan Job Settings

Introduction

When you make a scan, you can define the following. How the original looks. How the resulting file must look. Generic settings for the whole job.

To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of logical settings for the [Original] and the [Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The automated settings have the prefix [Auto].

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

[54] The scan job settings

Section Description

1 [Original] The [Original] section contains the settings to define how the original looks.

2 [File] The [File] section contains the settings to define how the resulting file must look. 4

Scan Your Documents

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 261 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Section Description

3 [Job] The [Job] section enables you to define generic proper- ties for the whole job.

4 Preview The preview section shows the result of the settings de- fined for the output.

5 Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select actions, for example, save settings to a template, cancel a job, or start scanning. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and finishing settings for the page ranges in a job. The optional [Page pro- gramming] function is available when you scan subsets into one file.

[Original] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided] The automatically set value for this setting.

[1-sided]

Only the front side contains an image or text.

[2-sided]

Both the front side and the back side contain an im- age or text.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

262 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Original] Settings - [Original type]

Setting Values Description

[Original type] The automatically set value for this setting.

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the left- hand side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,

the image or text on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 263 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Original] Settings - [Size]

Setting Values Description

[Size]

A4, A3, Letter, Ledg- er, etc.

Original in the ADF or on the glass plate: Automatic size detection, or Enter the media format of the original.

When your original has a non-standard size, you can use the - and + buttons to enter the exact measures. You can enter the measures in steps of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of the[Size] button changes into [Custom].

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

Automatic orientation detection, or Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size me-

dia

[Original] Settings - [Image type]

Setting Values Description

[Image type]

[Mixed]

The original contains a combination of text and im- ages.

[Photo]

The original contains mainly or only images.

[Text]

The original contains mainly or only text.

[File] Settings - [Type]

Setting Values Description

[Type] [Format] Select the required format.

[Compression]

Define the compression factor to reduce the file size.

NOTE A higher compression factor results in a scan with lower quality.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

264 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[File] Settings - [Resolution]

Setting Values Description

[Resolution] [300 dpi] Select [300 dpi] when you want to view or archive the generated file, for example.

[600 dpi]

Select [600 dpi] when you want to print or edit the generated file, for example.

[File] Settings - [Size]

Setting Values Description

[Size] All media sizes that the media catalog supports

Select the media size of the resulting file.

[File] Settings - [Zoom]

Setting Values Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] You can select a media size for the file that differs from the media size of the original. When the [Fit to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the original in such a way that the image fits on the se- lected media size of the file.

[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually within the range 25% to 400%.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 265 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[File] Settings - [Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Top left]

The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the posi- tion of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right cor- ner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

266 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[File] Settings - [Margin erase]

Setting Values Description

[Margin erase] [Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these elements on the copy. With the + and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can define how much margin of the original you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

[File] Settings - [Exposure]

Setting Values Description

[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark areas on the print separately. When an area on the output must be darker,

then select a value of -1 to -3. When the area must be lighter, then select a val-

ue of 1 to 3.

[Light] When the area must be darker, then select a val- ue of -1 to -3.

When an area on the output must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.

[File] Settings - [Color/Black & white]

Setting Values Description

[Color/Black & white] [Black and white]

Select this setting to make black & white scans.

[Grayscale]

Select this setting to make grayscale scans. When you select this option, the [Image type] and [Zoom] functions are disabled. The file type auto- matically changes into the preferred settings.

[Color]

Select this setting to make color scans.

NOTE To make color scans, the color scanning option must be licensed.

[Job name]

Setting Values Description

[Job name] For scan to USB, you can enter a job name.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 267 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Destination]

Setting Values Description

[Destination] For scan to USB, you can enter the destination of the scan job on the USB drive. You can select ei- ther the root of the USB drive, or a new folder called ScansX, whereby X is an incrementing num- ber. The first time you use this option, the folder will be called Scans1.

[Enter the user code.]

Setting Values Description

[Enter the user code.]

This setting applies only to scan-to-email jobs. To use the scan-to-email function, an LDAP server must be configured. The LDAP server contains a mapping of unique user codes and email address- es. When you enter your user code, for example your employee number or telephone number, the LDAP server checks if you are a registered user. If you are a registered user, the system sends the scan job as an attachment to the corresponding email address.

NOTE The name of this button depends on the name defined in the scan profile file.

[Account ID]

Setting Values Description

[Account ID] Enter the account ID for the current job. The [Ac- count ID] setting is only available when the ac- counting function on the PRISMAsync controller is enabled.

Description of the Scan Job Settings

268 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan to File

NOTE Scanning mixed size originals is supported.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan-to-file profile.

The job window opens. 4. Change the settings for the original and the file. 5. Touch [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the scan server. The file is stored with a predefined name in a designated directory. There is no message on the control panel to inform you that the file was stored successfully. You can access the status information on the controller.

Scan to File

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 269 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan to Email

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan profile.

The job window opens.

NOTE The system administrator can create scan profiles in addition to the factory default profiles (see Use the Scan Profiles File (sjt.csv) on page 255).

4. Select email as [Destination]. 5. Change the settings for the original and the file. 6. If applicable, change the subject at [Email subject].

A keyboard appears to enter the subject. 7. At [Email address] enter an email address or user ID.

You can enter more email addresses when you configured this option in the Settings Editor (see Configure the Settings for Scan to Email on page 252). Separate the email addresses with a ';'. When you entered a user ID, the corresponding email address is displayed. You must configure the connection between the ID and email address (see Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server on page 253 and Use the Address List File (ral.csv) on page 254).

8. Touch [Start] . The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the entered email address or email addresses.

Scan to Email

270 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan to USB

Illustration

[55] Scan to USB

Procedure

1. Insert a USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel. 2. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face

down on the glass plate. 3. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to USB].

The job window opens. 4. Change the settings for the original and the file. 5. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.

Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK]. 6. Touch [Destination] to indicate the folder on your USB drive where you want to save the file. 7. If applicable, enter the [Account ID]. 8. Touch [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to your USB drive. 9. Touch to eject the USB drive. 10. Remove the USB drive from the control panel when the message [USB drive has been

successfully ejected.] displays.

Scan to USB

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 271 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan to DocBox

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [To DocBox]. The job window opens.

3. Change the settings for the original and the file. 4. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.

Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK]. 5. Touch the [Destination] button. 6. From the drop-down menu, touch [DocBox] 7. Touch the [DocBox] button 8. Touch the DocBox to which you want to scan the job. 9. Press [OK]. 10. Press [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the selected DocBox.

Scan to DocBox

272 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan to SMB

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face down on the glass plate.

2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to SMB]. The job window opens.

3. Change the settings for the original and the file. 4. Press [Start] .

The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the shared device.

Scan to SMB

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 273 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

Introduction

When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 2. Select an existing copy or scan job template. 3. Make the required settings for the recurring job. 4. Touch [Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template. 5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK]. 6. Press [Cancel].

The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.

You can now select the following options. [Rename]. [Move].

Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location. The location of the [Last used] template is set.

[Delete]

NOTE Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a template.

Create templates to use for recurring jobs

274 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Combine subsets into one file

Introduction

You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.

Procedure

1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF or face down on the glass plate. 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> Scan profile -> [Subsets] 3. Define the subset settings for both [Original] and [File].

NOTE Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and [Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after scanning the first subset.

4. Press [Scan]. 5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. 6. Repeat the steps 3 - 5 for all other subsets.

A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.

NOTE When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.

7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed. A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can add, insert, delete or edit subsets.

8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media and finishing settings per page range.

9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function. 10. Press .

Combine subsets into one file

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 275 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Optimize the Scan Quality

Introduction

The printer can detect photos, rasters and fine lines on the original. This information is processed in such a way that the digital result has a high scan quality. This means that in most cases you do not need to adjust quality settings to get the best result.

Problems and Solutions

Overview of possible scan problems and solutions

Description of the problem Solution

All the pages are upside down

You placed the originals in the wrong direction into the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the glass plate. Make sure the originals are placed correctly and scan the originals again.

Every second page is up- side down

The [Original type] and [Size] settings that you selected do not cor- respond with the orientation of the information on the originals. Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the originals again.

All the pages are posi- tioned sideways

There is more than one explanation for this problem. Wrong orientation selected. Original feed direction confused with the orientation of the in-

formation on the original. The application you use does not process the TIFF/PDF file in

the right way.

Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the originals again. If the problem remains, the application you use can be the cause of the problem. Check the results in another ap- plication.

The information on the page is too large or too small

This problem can occur when the size of the original and the selec- ted size of the target scan are not the same. The problem can also be caused by a (manual) change in the zoom factor. Check the size of the [Original] and the [File] on the operator panel and scan the originals again.

The information on the page is too light or too dark

You can change the [Exposure] settings to influence the result.

Procedure

1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place one original face down on the glass plate. 2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. 3. Select a scan profile. 4. Define the settings for the [Original] 5. From the [Image type] setting, select the correct type of original ([Photo], [Text] or [Mixed]) 6. Define the settings for the [File]. 7. Select [Exposure]. 8. Select the desired value to change the settings for the [Light] and [Dark]areas on the scan.

[Light]: When the area must be darker, then select a value of -1 to -3. When an area on the output is light gray but must be white, then select a value of 1 to 3.

Optimize the Scan Quality

276 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Dark]: When an area on the output is dark gray but must be black, then select a value of -1 to -3. When the area must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.

9. Press [OK].

Optimize the Scan Quality

Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 277 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Optimize the Scan Quality

278 Chapter 8 - Carry Out Scan Jobs Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 9 Use the DocBox (Option)

The DocBox Function

Introduction to the DocBox Function

Introduction

DocBox is short for Document Box. The DocBox function, which is available through the operator panel, creates a buffer between the preparation of a job, for example page programming, and the printing of the job. The DocBox supports the operator by offering comprehensive means to store, group, edit and reprint documents. These editing options are a subset of the PRISMAprepare job preparation software.

A DocBox can contain the following jobs: Print jobs Scan jobs

NOTE In the Settings Editor, the system administrator can create as many DocBoxes as required, for example a DocBox for each individual customer or department.

Illustration

[56] The starting page for DocBox jobs

When to Use the DocBox

For example: To carry out advanced job preparation actions. To correct settings when the proof print is not correct, for example change the print quality or

layout of a document.

The DocBox Function

280 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

To combine analogue documents with digital documents. To store jobs that must be reprinted regularly, for examples reports or books.

Introduction to the DocBox Function

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 281 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Create a New DocBox

Illustration

[57] Create a DocBox

Procedure

NOTE Only the System Administrator is allowed to create a new DocBox in the Settings Editor.

1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller. 2. Log on to the Settings Editor as System Administrator. 3. Select [Workflow] -> [DocBox]. 4. Click [Add]. 5. Enter a new DocBox name. Identical DocBoxes are not allowed. 6. If you want to secure the new DocBox with a PIN, set [PIN enabled] to [Yes] and enter a PIN to

secure the DocBox. Each time you access this DocBox through the operator panel, you must enter this PIN.

7. Confirm the PIN. 8. Click [OK].

Create a New DocBox

282 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Introduction

When you select a job in a DocBox and touch [Properties], the current settings of the selected job are displayed. Below, the available settings are described.

NOTE Depending on the type of job you want to edit, either a print job or scan job, some settings cannot be changed. When a setting cannot be changed, the setting is greyed out.

Illustration

1

2

3

4

5

Number Pane Description

1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the settings you can de- fine for the paper originals

2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the generic settings you can define for the whole job

3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the settings you can define for the job 4

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 283 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Number Pane Description

4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output.

5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car- ry out. With the optional [Page programming] function, you can insert pages and define the media and fin- ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.

[1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on one side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

284 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Binding edge]

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge]

[Portrait left]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. When you turn a sheet over the binding

edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Portrait top]

The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the top. When you turn a sheet over the binding

edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape left]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the left-hand side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Landscape top]

The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge of the original is at the top.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back side of the sheet is in readable form.

[Media]

Setting Values Description

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalogue

Here you can select the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary me- dia. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor.

NOTE You can only change to media with the same size, for example, from A4 blue to A4 green.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 285 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Cover]

Setting Values Description

[Cover]

[Front]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Front] is [On] then the [Media] setting below [Front] becomes enabled.

[Media] When [Front] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalog to use as front cover.

[Print sides] When [Front] is [On], you can indicate which side of the front cover must be printed. You can select. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Back] is [On] then the [Media] set- ting below [Back] becomes enabled.

[Media] When [Back] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalogue to use as back cover.

[Print sides] When [Back] is [On], you can indicate which side of the back cover must be printed. You can select: [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

286 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Layout]

Setting Values Description

[Layout]

[Normal]

The machine prints the pages with no special lay- out settings.

[Booklet]

The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The pages one and four are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages two and three are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The machine prints the same image multiple times next to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. When you copy A4/LTR originals with the setting [Same up] and [Images per sheet] is two, the ma- chine will automatically print the job on A3 / 11" x 17", for example. When you cut the A3 / 11"x 17" sheets in two, you get two identical A4 / LTR cop- ies of your document. To reduce your A4/LTR orig- inals to A5/STMT prints, you can use the zoom function or select another media type.

[Multiple up]

The machine prints multiple consecutive images on one side of a sheet, next to each other.

[Same-up flipped]

The machine prints the same image twice on one side of a sheet, but one image is upside down compared to the other.

[Images per sheet] Here, you can select the number of images you want to print when you select [Same up] or [Multi- ple up].

[Zoom]

Setting Values Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so it fits onto the page. When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the image is maintained.

[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview pane immediately shows the results of your ac- tion.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 287 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

288 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Shift]

Setting Values Description

[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output, for example. Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output, for example. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 289 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Print delivery]

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 1 [Output location] Select the output location for the job. Depend- ing on the settings for your copy job, the ma- chine automatically suggests the preferred output location for your job. However, you can manually overrule this suggestion. [Stacker/stapler upper tray]

Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Stacker/stapler lower tray] Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Stacker/stapler booklet tray] Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Folder main tray] Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the folder.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in the workflow profile.

[Each set] Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to recognize individual sets.

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca- tion are stacked in a straight stack.

[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad- vanced settings when an offline finisher pro- cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please refer to the finisher manuals for more informa- tion. 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

290 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 2 [Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.

[Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in landscape position (horizon- tal). 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 291 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] 3 [Print order] [Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Rotation] [0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Setting Values Description

[Margin erase]

[Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes or punch holes, for example. The machine allows you to hide these elements on the copy. With the + and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can define how much margin of the original you want to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm / 3.94".

[Exposure]

Setting Values Description

[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark areas on the print separately. When an area on the output must be darker,

then select a value of -1 to -3. When the area must be lighter, then select a val-

ue of 1 to 3.

[Light] When the area must be darker, then select a val- ue of -1 to -3.

When an area on the output must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

292 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Print quality]

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] 1 [Brightness] (default 0)

When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the brightness can correct this prob- lem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed ras- tered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

[Advanced settings] The advanced settings are intended for special print jobs, such as printing bar codes or print- ing a color image on a B/W printer.

[Fattening] (default [Off])

The fattening function can increase the reada- bility of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72 inch). However, when you print special data such as bar codes, fattening can make bar codes diffi- cult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fatten- ing function off when you print such special data.

[Minimum line width] (default [On])

The minimum line width function is required to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600 inch. However, when you print special data such as CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required. Therefore, you can turn the minimum line width function off. Then even thinner lines will be printed. 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 293 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] 2 [RIP resolution] (de- fault [600x2400] dpi)

The RIP resolution can improve the readability of fine details. When you print very thin, slan- ted lines, for example in Chinese characters, 1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is best suited for mainly horizontal and vertical objects.

[RIP raster] (default [LINE_200LPI])

The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best suited for over 95% of all prints. In special ca- ses, for example moir patterns from scanned images, you can try to improve the print result with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the [DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may loose some fine details. The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is [LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compati- ble with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and 1200x1200 dpi.

[Color profile] (default [Normal])

You can use color profiles when you print col- or images on a B&W printer. The selected col- or profile determines how a color image is re- produced in black and white. [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by

Oc that converts CMYK or RGB data into different gray values in a contrast-balanced way. When you select [Enhanced], the im- ages will become lighter, softer and less contrast-rich.

[Normal] is a color profile developed by Adobe that converts color data into gray values. When you select [Normal], the im- ages will become darker and more contrast- rich.

NOTE You can also use your own color profiles. Make the required settings in the Settings Editor.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

294 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Binding]

Setting Values Description

[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta- ples. Furthermore you can define where you want the staples with the [Location] option. The available locations for one staple: [Top left] [Top right] [Bottom left] [Bottom right]

The available locations for two staples: [Left edge] [Top edge] [Bottom edge] [Right edge]

Check the preview for the result of the selection.

[1 staple]

[2 staples]

[Saddle stitching]

[Folding]

This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 295 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Folding]

[None]

[Z-fold]

Required output location for Z-folded A4R, Let- terR and Legal: Folder output tray, or Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.

NOTE Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17" sheets must be sent to the stacker/ stapler.

[Z-fold large sheets only]

Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.

[Tri-fold in]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Tri-fold out]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Parallel fold]

Required output location: Folder output tray

[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on which side to print: [Print inside] [Print outside]

Check the preview for the result of the selec- tion.

[Trimming]

This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

296 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Values Description

[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.

[Trim size]

You can indicate the amount of trimming at the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to 20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")

[Finishing size]

You can indicate the size of the resulting docu- ment after trimming. You can either touch [Size] to select a default media size or manual- ly define the width and length of the docu- ment. When you define a non-standard media size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].

[Punching]

This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.

Setting Values Description

[Punching]

[None]

Here you can select the required number and the location of the punch holes. Location: [Left] [Top] [Right] [Bottom]

[2 holes]

[3 holes]

[4 holes]

[Die set dependent]

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 297 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

[Number of sets]

Setting Values Description

[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled, the printer stops after the first set of a job has been printed. You can check the quality of the output.

NOTE This setting is only available when in the workflow profile [Check first set] is set to [As in job].

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job you need. You can enter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

[Job name]

Setting Values Description

[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change the name of the job. When you touch the [Job name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can change the name of the job.

[Page range]

Setting Values Description

[Page range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will be printed.

[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, use the [From] and [To] fields to indicate the first and last pa- ges you want printed.

[Separator sheets]

Setting Values Description

[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is ena- bled, a separate sheet is inserted automatically before each set of a job to create a clear dis- tinction between two sets. Separator sheets are always empty. In the Settings Editor, select a media from the media catalog use as separa- tor sheets. You can also indicate the feed di- rection of the separator sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).

[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

298 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Edit a Job in a DocBox

Illustration

[58] Use page programming

[59] Add a page

Edit a Job in a DocBox

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 299 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to edit. 3. Touch the job you want to edit. 4. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. 5. If you want to carry out extended page programming, touch [Page programming]. 6. Change the required settings. 7. Press [OK].

Edit a Job in a DocBox

300 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)

Introduction

You can combine a job in a DocBox with other jobs from the same DocBox. The system creates a new job from the selected jobs. The icon indicates a built job.

Illustration

[60] The [Create build] window

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to combine. 3. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple

jobs at once. 4. Touch the [Build] button or select [Build] from the drop-down menu.

A [Create build] window appears that allows you to make some changes. 5. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 6. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of sets]. 7. Press [OK].

Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 301 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Split a Combined Job in the DocBox

Introduction

You can split a combined job in the DocBox into the original separate jobs. Then the system restores the jobs with their original settings and status. You cannot split a combined job in the list of Waiting jobs.

NOTE You can only split a job when the job is not locked. Otherwise, you must unlock the job first.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to split. 3. Touch the job you want to split. 4. Touch the [Split] button, or select [Split] from the drop-down menu.

The DocBox displays the original jobs.

Split a Combined Job in the DocBox

302 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Lock a Job in a DocBox

Introduction

The DocBox allows you to lock the settings of your jobs. Advantages: Settings cannot be changed accidentally. The job is always printed exactly the same.

Illustration

[61] Select [Lock].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to lock. 3. Touch one or more jobs that you want to lock, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select

multiple jobs at once. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Lock].

indicates that the job is locked.

Lock a Job in a DocBox

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 303 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Unlock a Job in a DocBox

Introduction

Unlocking a job can be required if you want to split a locked, combined job into the original jobs, for example.

Illustration

[62] Select [Unlock].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to unlock. 3. Touch the job that you want to unlock. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Unlock].

Unlock a Job in a DocBox

304 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Move a Job from One DocBox to Another

Illustration

[63] Move a DocBox job

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox button that contains the job you want to move. 3. Touch the job you want to move. 4. Touch the [Move] button, or select [Move] from the drop-down menu. 5. Touch the destination. 6. Press [OK].

Move a Job from One DocBox to Another

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 305 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print the Jobs in a DocBox

Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print] to print the non-urgent job.

Print the Jobs in a DocBox

306 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print now] to print the urgent job immediately.

Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 307 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox

Introduction

When you want to print one job in a DocBox you can select and print that job. However, you can also select multiple jobs at a time. The table below shows the available options.

Select multiple jobs

Jobs Description

[All] Select all the jobs from the active DocBox.

[Jobs with available media] These are the jobs for which the required media are cur- rently available in the paper trays.

[Jobs with label] These are the jobs that have a label. A label is a name that helps you to identify certain jobs on the operator panel, for example the name of a customer. The label can be defined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated workflow. For example, the label Custom- er XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

[Printed jobs] These are the jobs that have already been printed be- fore.

[New jobs] These are the jobs that have not been printed yet.

Manually Touch the required jobs one by one

Illustration

[64] Select multiple jobs

Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox

308 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to print. 3. Touch the [Select] button. 4. From the drop-down menu, select the required option. 5. Press [Print].

Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox

Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) 309 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox

310 Chapter 9 - Use the DocBox (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 10 Removable Hard Disk (Option)

Introduction to the Removable Hard Disk

Introduction

The PRISMAsync controller can be equipped with a removable hard disk. The removable hard disk is located behind the horizontal cover in front of the control panel.

IMPORTANT Avoid installing the machine at high altitudes above approximately 3,000 meters above sea level, or higher. Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes above approximately 3,000 meters above sea level, or higher.

Illustration

[65] Location of the removable hard disk

Using the Removable Hard Disk

The removable hard disk is intended to prevent the theft of confidential data. After working hours, for example, the hard disk can be removed from the controller and stored in a safe. The next working day, the hard disk must be placed back before the printer is turned on.

A lock in front of the removable hard disk prevents unauthorized removal of the hard disk. For security reasons, only a limited number of people will have a key to the lock.

Each removable hard disk is unique. Always use the same dedicated removable hard disk with a particular printer.

Introduction to the Removable Hard Disk

312 Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Main Parts

Illustration

34

1

2

[66] Main parts of the removable hard disk

Part Description

1 Hard disk

2 Hard disk housing

3 Right-hand handle

4 Left-hand latch

Main Parts

Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) 313 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Remove the Removable Hard Disk

Before you begin

Shut down the printer completely.

Wait until the Sleep button and the On/Off button are off.

Remove the removable hard disk

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the cover (1) in front of the oper- ator panel.

1

3

2

2 Remove the staple box (2).

3 Remove the lock (3).

4 Press the left-hand latch (1) of the hard disk housing. The right-hand handle (2) is released.

1

2

5 Pull the right-hand handle to slide out the removable hard disk.

6 Place the staple box back.

7 Close the cover.

8 Store the hard disk in a secure place, for example a safe.

Remove the Removable Hard Disk

314 Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Insert the Removable Hard Disk

Before you begin

Make sure that the printer is completely off before you insert the removable hard disk.

Step Action Illustration

1 Take the removable hard disk from the secure location where it is stored.

2 Open the cover in front of the op- erator panel.

3 Remove the staple box.

4 Slide the removable hard disk in. Make sure that you push the hard disk itself. Do not use the right-hand handle to slide the hard disk in.

5 When the hard disk is completely inserted, close the right-hand handle (1). A click confirms that the right- hand handle is locked correctly behind the left-hand latch (2).

2

1

6 Place the lock (1).

3

1

2

7 Place the staple box (2) back.

8 Close the cover (3).

4

Insert the Removable Hard Disk

Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) 315 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

9 Press the On/Off button to turn the printer on.

Insert the Removable Hard Disk

316 Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

When Then

You turn the printer on while the removable hard disk is not inserted

The printer operator panel displays an error message. Press the On/Off button behind the printer

operator panel for approximately 5 seconds. The printer will shut down.

Insert the correct hard disk for this printer. Press the On/Off button to turn on the print-

er.

You turn the printer on while the hard disk of a different printer is inserted

NOTE Do not insert other hard disks or hard disks without the correct varioPRINT 135 Series software. The printer will not function correctly.

Troubleshooting

Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) 317 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Troubleshooting

318 Chapter 10 - Removable Hard Disk (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 11 Remote Service (ORS) (Option)

Remote Service

Introduction

NOTE Remote Service requires a license. Remote Service also requires a permission to an Canon site outside the customer domain, either via a proxy server or via IP white list. Contact your local IT specialist to give you the permission.

Remote Service is an application that runs on a printer or a separate server in the customer's network. Remote Service requires a working Internet connection to establish a secure connection between the customer's site and Canon. In case a proxy server is present, Remote Service must be configured correctly.

Remote Service has the following functionality:

Functionality Description

Remote Diagnostics When a customer contacts Canon in case of a problem, Canon can automatically retrieve service related data from the printer for analysis and troubleshooting. With these data, Canon can quickly identify the source of the problem and possibly solve the problem via the telephone.

Remote Meter Reading With this function counter information that is needed for billing can be automatically sent to Canon on a regular basis. Then the customer does not need to collect the metre readings manually and send these to Canon. The customer can always check the sent data and approve the meter readings. 4

Remote Service

320 Chapter 11 - Remote Service (ORS) (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Functionality Description

Remote Software Upgrade With this function, the customer can update the printer with the latest software. The software is only retrieved from Canon when the customer wants this. From release 3.3 onwards, the jobs on the system are not deleted after you upgraded the software.

Illustration

Using Remote Service

In the Settings Editor, all settings for the customer's proxy server must be set correctly ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity] -> [Proxy server]).

Via the control panel, the remote connection must be enabled ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Remote connection] -> [Remote connection enabled] -> [Yes]).

Via the control panel, you can test the remote connection ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Remote connection] -> [Test Remote connection]). The test can take up to 30 seconds. When the connection is not OK, a message indicates the reason for the failure.

The dashboard of the control panel displays a red icon (see figure) when the printer becomes disconnected from the Internet. Make sure the connection is online, because otherwise Canon cannot retrieve data from your printer.

If required, you can change a number of connectivity settings via the control panel ([System] -> [Setup] ->[Local key operator settings] -> [Connectivity]).

You can verify the communication with Canon by downloading the audit log files via the Settings Editor ([Support] -> [Logging] > [Save the log files of the remote service connection]). The Settings Editor keeps up to four audit log files. Each log file can contain maximum 10 Mb of data. When all 4 files are full, the first file is overwritten. You can open the audit log files with any text editing application.

Remote Service

Chapter 11 - Remote Service (ORS) (Option) 321 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Remote Service

322 Chapter 11 - Remote Service (ORS) (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 12 Remote Monitor (Option)

Remote Monitor

Description

NOTE Remote Monitor requires a license.

Remote Monitor is a web application that you can access via a URL from a remote PC. The application shows part of the operator panel with up-to-date status information, for example about how long the printer can continue printing without operator intervention.

Remote Monitor also has an alert function. The Remote Monitor window will automatically pop up on your PC monitor when the printer status changes from 'running' (attention light is green) to 'stopped' (attention light is red) or 'going to stop' (attention light is orange).

For confidentiality reasons, Remote Monitor does not display job information.

Specifications

Remote Monitor specifications

URL to access Remote Monitor http:// /remoteinfo https:// /remoteinfo

Recommended resolution of your computer screen

Minimum 640 x 480 pixels

Supported web browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 and higher Mozilla Firefox 3 and higher Google Chrome Apple Safari

Language As defined in your browser, as long as the printer sup- ports this language

Update frequency Every 5 seconds

Time line Fixed (30 minutes)

Printer information displayed Host name System mode Status panel Attention light Operator instruction Time line

Remote Monitor

324 Chapter 12 - Remote Monitor (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 13 PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)

With PRISMAsync Remote Manager you can monitor printers, operate printers remotely and send jobs and ready-to-print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers. You must enable and configure PRISMAsync Remote Manager in the Settings Editor.

Refer to the user manual for the PRISMAsync Remote Manager for the options available when using this product.

326 Chapter 13 - PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 14 Counters

Introduction to the Counters

Description

The following table describes the counters in the [Maintenance] section of the [System] view.

Counter information

Type of counter Description

[Billing counters] The [Billing counters] display the total number of normal and large prints that have been made since the printer was installed. A service technician can configure the billing counters displayed. You cannot re- set the billing counters.

[Day counters] The [Day counters] display the number of normal (A4/Letter-like) and large (A3/Tabloid-like) prints that have been made since the counter was last reset to 0. You can reset the day counters at the beginning of a working day or before you start a new job for a specific customer, for example.

NOTE The [Billing counters] and the [Day counters] provide information about the number of one-sided and two-sided prints that have been made on normal and large media. The length of the media determines whether a media is normal or large. Media with a length of less than 364 mm (14.3") are referred to and counted as normal media, for example A4/Letter. Media with a length of 364 mm (14.3") or more are referred to and counted as large media, for example A3/Tabloid.

Introduction to the Counters

328 Chapter 14 - Counters Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Reset the Day Counters

Illustration

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Reset day counters]. A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you really want to reset the day counters.

2. Touch [Yes] to reset the day counters to 0.

Reset the Day Counters

Chapter 14 - Counters 329 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Print the Billing Counters Report

Introduction

You can print a report that contains all figures of the configured billing counters. The language of the billing counters report is the same as the selected language for the system.

Illustration

[67] Print the billing counters report

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Print billing counters report].

Print the Billing Counters Report

330 Chapter 14 - Counters Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 15 Accounting

General Information

Introduction to the Accounting Function

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

The accounting function is meant to charge the costs for print, copy and scan jobs to customers or users.

Below, the basics of accounting are described. Detailed information about the accounting function is described in separate chapters.

Basics

Mandatory: To use the accounting function, a license file must be uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller first. Then the account log file is created too. For each job, the account log file stores job information such as type of job and account ID, if applicable. To calculate the costs, you can download the account log files via the Settings Editor.

Optional: If you want to distinguish jobs for various customers, you must use account IDs. An account ID is a number that is unique for a certain customer. To be able to enter account IDs, you must set the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor to [Yes]. From now on, each job requires an account ID. However, any ID entered is considered valid. Jobs with an account ID can be recognized by a $ on the job icon. On the control panel, the [Account ID] and the [Accounting mode] buttons become available.

Optional: If you want to make sure that only predefined account IDs are accepted, you must set the [Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor to [Yes] and upload an account ID file to the PRISMAsync controller. The account ID file ('accid.csv') must contain account related information, but at least account IDs. Now the PRISMAsync controller checks whether an account ID entered on the control panel is predefined in the account ID file. When you enter a non-valid account ID for a job, the control panel displays the message [Invalid account ID. Enter a valid account ID.]. You must enter a valid account ID to continue with this job.

NOTE In the Settings Editor, navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting] for all accounting settings. Only key operators or system administrators can perform actions in the [Accounting] section.

General Information

332 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor

Description

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

The table below describes the available accounting related settings in the Settings Editor (navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting]).

The accounting related settings

Setting Description

[Save account log files] You can save the account log files to a location on your PC or network to create invoices for customers, for ex- ample.

[Upload account ID file] [Upload a file with account IDs to make sure that submit- ted print jobs will only be printed when they have a valid account ID. To use this functionality, verification of ac- count IDs must be activated.]

[Download account ID file] [Download the file with account IDs from the system, for example to update the file with new IDs.]

[Default account ID for streaming jobs]

[Use this setting to define the default account ID that is used when the system processes streaming jobs.]

[Identification enabled] [Enable this setting if every job which is printed/copied on the system must have an account ID.]

[Verification enabled] [Enable this setting if the account ID of every job must be verified. For this verification, an account ID file must be uploaded to the system.]

[Account field separator] This setting allows you to select the character used in the account log files to separate the information. You can select [Use ';' (semi-colon)] or [Use ',' (comma)].

[UTF-8 header enabled] This settings allows you to indicate that the account log files must be encoded in UTF-8.

The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor

Chapter 15 - Accounting 333 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

To be able to enter account IDs for jobs, the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes].

If you want to make sure that the PRISMAsync controller accepts only predefined account IDs, the [Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes] too. Then an account ID file is required too.

NOTE You can only enable the verification function when the identification function was enabled first.

Procedure

NOTE System administrators only.

1. Access the Settings Editor. 2. Click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 3. To enable the identification function, click [Identification enabled] -> [Yes] -> [OK]. 4. To enable the verification function, click [Verification enabled] -> [Yes] -> [OK].

NOTE When both the [Identification enabled] and the [Verification enabled] settings in the Settings Editor are set to [Yes], the control panel displays the account name that corresponds to the account ID as defined in the 'accid.csv' file. When no account name is defined, the control panel displays the account ID.

Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs

334 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Account ID File

The Account ID File

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

All account related information, such as account IDs and account names, is stored in an account ID file ('accid.csv'). You can download this file via the Settings Editor to add, edit or delete account information. You can enter a maximum of 2,000 account IDs. Make sure that each account ID is unique.

NOTE The first row of the account ID file contains header information. Do not change or delete this row.

The content of the Account ID File

The account ID file contains 4 columns with the account information. Only the first two columns and are mandatory. Filling in the other columns is optional.

The content of the account ID file

Data field Description

All accounts, starting in row two, must have the ID 4313.

This column contains the IDs (maximum 40 characters) that will be checked for validity when [Verification enabled] is set to [Yes].

NOTE You can only enter 12 digits on the control panel.

This column contains the account name (maximum 40 characters) that corresponds with the account ID in the second column. When you enter an account ID and [Verification enabled] is set to [Yes], the control panel displays the name that corresponds with the account ID. When no name is defined in the account ID file, the control panel displays the account ID.

This column is a free text field (maximum 255 characters) where you can enter additional information about an account, for exam- ple the maximum monthly print volume. This information is not displayed on the control panel.

The Account ID File

Chapter 15 - Accounting 335 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File

Procedure

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 2. Click [Download account ID file]. 3. Click the link to the 'accid.csv' file. 4. Click [Save]. 5. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save]. 6. Using Microsoft Excel, for example, you can now add, edit, or delete account IDs from the file,

then click [Save]. 7. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 8. Click [Upload account ID file]. 9. Browse to the location of the changed 'accid.csv' file. 10. Select the required file and click 'Open'. 11. Click [Upload account ID file].

Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File

336 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

The Account Log File

The Account Log File

The Name of an Account Log File

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

An account log file has the following name format:

, for example 012345678920120115.CSV.

Item Description

The serial number of the device. This number is a text string with a maximum length of 10 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9). The serial number is provided by the PRISMAsync con- troller at the moment the account log file is created.

The year, month and day the account log file was created.

The file extension, either .CSV (Comma Separated Values) for inactive log files, or .ACL (ACtive Log) for the active log file. For the current day, the file has the extension .ACL. At midnight, the .ACL file is converted into a .CSV file. The PRISMAsync controller can store a maximum of 99 .CSV files + 1 .ACL file. When the limit is reached, the oldest .CSV file is removed. You can retrieve the account log files from the Settings Editor ([Config- uration] -> [Accounting] -> [Save account log files]) and import the files into Microsoft Excel, for example.

Data Records

An account log file consists of data records. The data records contain information about the use of the varioPRINT 135 Series. For each job, a new data record is added to the current account log file.

The first record of an account log file is the header record. The header record always starts with 4302. Every subsequent data record starts with 4303. These records contain the actual accounting information for each job.

The Fields of an Account Log File

The following table describes the fields of each data record in an account log file.

Field name Specification Description

4303 A number that identifies a data record. 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 15 - Accounting 337 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Field name Specification Description

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

A unique identification for a job or document, which is supplied by the submitter of the job. The document ID is extracted from the print data, for ex- ample the attribute 'documentid' in an OJT. This field keeps the same value when the job is submit- ted multiple times. The field is empty when the at- tribute is not available.

A number The PRISMAsync controller creates a unique job identification number when: A new print job is received A new copy or scan job is started An existing job is started from the mailbox An existing job is moved from the [Printed jobs]

section to the [Waiting jobs] section

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

Possible entries: COPY IP AP SYSTEM SCAN SCAN2MBX MBXCOPY

Describes the type of job. COPY: Direct copy job IP: Interactive print job (a job that was printed

from the mailbox). AP: Automatic print job (a job that was directly

printed from the network, not from the mailbox) SYSTEM: A test print that was started in the serv-

ice mode or service copy mode. SCAN: A scan-to-file job. SCAN2MBX: A job that was scanned to the mail-

box. MBXCOPY: A copy job that was printed from the

mailbox.

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

- -

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the date format changes into the date for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The date on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

4

The Account Log File

338 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Field name Specification Description

: :

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the time format changes into the time for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The time on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

: : The total time the job is active and actually printing. Hours can exceed 24.

: : The total time the job is active, but waits for an ac- tion by the operator, such as clearing an error or loading the required media. Hours can exceed 24.

- -

The date on which the job was finished or aborted.

: : The time the job was finished or aborted.

Possible entries: Done Abrt Stop

Information about how the job was completed. Done: The job was finished correctly. Abrt: The operator or the PRISMAsync controller

stopped or aborted the job, for example in case of an error.

Stop: The job was stopped by the user and moved to the [Waiting jobs] section. When the job is restarted or continued later, multiple ac- count records will be generated for this job.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The user name that is defined for the job, for exam- ple in the attribute 'username' in an OJT.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the job for automatic or interactive print jobs and scan jobs, for example in the attrib- ute 'jobname' in an OJT. For scan jobs, the gener- ated file name is used.

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of a department or user as defined in the [Cost center] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'GroupName' in an OJT. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

Information as defined in the [Custom] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'custom' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 15 - Accounting 339 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Field name Specification Description

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The account ID as defined in the [Account ID] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver, or on the control panel, or in the attribute 'accountid' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the recipient of the print job. The name is extracted from the print data, for example the attribute 'jobaddressee' in an OJT.

A number The number of scanned A4-like sheets, including custom sized sheets of which at least one dimen- sion is equal to or less than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of scanned A3-like sheets, including custom sized sheets of which all dimensions are larger than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of times that a single staple was used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of times that double staples were used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of finished sets. A set is finished after the last sheet is sent to the output location.

Names of output loca- tions

A descriptive name of the output location. The ex- act names vary per product and depend on the con- figuration of the product.

A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of black toner for sheets that are printed or copied in B&W.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of toner for sheets that are printed or copied in color. 4

The Account Log File

340 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Field name Specification Description

(1-16)*

A number The number of 1-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A number The number of 2-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The media size used for the job. Not every product supports all media sizes.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters. Some entries are standardized: PLAIN TRANS COVER MYPAPER COLOR_COPY COATED OTHER

Description of the media types used. PLAIN: normal paper TRANS: transparencies COVER: a special front or back page MYPAPER: a special media type that must be

placed in a paper tray before starting the job, and that must be removed from that paper tray as soon as the job is ready.

COLOR_COPY: color copy paper COATED: coated media OTHER: unspecified media. This is used when

custom strings are not available.

(1-16)*

A number The weight of the media type in grams per m or lb.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The color of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A number If subsequent sheets are not identical (cyclic me- dia), the cycle length indicates after how many sheets the same sequence starts again. For normal media the cycle length is 1. For cyclic media with an unknown cycle length, the cycle length is 0.

(1-16)*

Yes or no ('y' or 'n') A media attribute that indicates whether the bit- maps are printed on this media (y) or not (n). An insert sheet can be 1-sided or 2-sided. The bit- maps corresponding to insert sheets typically are still part of the print job. Selection of insert media enforces that these bitmaps are not printed (again) on the insert media.

(1-16)* Yes or no ('y' or 'n') This is a media attribute that indicates whether the media is tab media. Typically, tab media has a cycle length of 1, but this is not mandatory

(1-16)*

A number The number of punch holes of the prepunched me- dia.

A number The number of punched sheets in a job.

A number The number of folded sheets in a job. 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 15 - Accounting 341 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Field name Specification Description

A number The number of booklets in a job.

A number The number of bound sets in a job.

NOTE * All fields that contain (1-16) will be included 16 times in an account log file. Each number refers to the type of media (1 up to 16) that is used. The media characteristics of the first media type in a job are logged in the fields ending on '1'. The characteristics of the next, different media type are logged in the fields ending with '2' and so on. For example, and both correspond to the second type of media used in a job. If you use less than 16 media types, the remaining fields are empty. If you use more than 16 media types, they are logged as if they were media type 16. The maximum number of media types per job is 16.

The Account Log File

342 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Save an Account Log File

Procedure

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 2. Click [Save account log files]. 3. Click the link to the required file, then click [Save]. 4. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save].

Save an Account Log File

Chapter 15 - Accounting 343 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Use Accounting

Select an Accounting Mode

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

When the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], the accounting function becomes available on the control panel. In the [Accounting mode] setting on the control panel, you can select when an account ID must be entered. The table below describes the options.

The accounting modes

Setting Description

[Per job] Each job requires an account ID. You can enter a new ac- count ID for each job. By default, the control panel dis- plays the account ID used for the previous job. However, you can change the account ID displayed.

[Per job(Clear account ID)] Each job requires an account ID. You must enter a new account ID for each job. The system clears the account ID used for the previous job. Therefore, the [Account ID] field in the [Job] pane is empty before the next job. 4

Use Accounting

344 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Description

[Fixed] The same account ID is used for all jobs until you select [Change account ID] or [Clear account ID] under [Sys- tem] -> [Setup] -> [Accounting] to terminate the fixed ac- count ID currently in use. When you use a fixed account ID, the [Account ID] field in the [Job] pane is grayed out.

NOTE The [Fixed] setting overrules account IDs that are indicated in applications or printer drivers. Therefore, select another accounting mode be- fore printing jobs that were submitted from an application or printer driver.

Illustration

[68] Select an accounting mode

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Accounting]. 2. Press [Accounting mode]. 3. Select the desired setting. 4. Press [OK].

Select an Accounting Mode

Chapter 15 - Accounting 345 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Enter an Account ID per Job

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

When the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], the accounting function becomes available on the control panel. The description below applies to entering an account ID on the control panel when the [Accounting mode] is set to [Per job(Clear account ID)].

Illustration

[69] The [Account ID] field in the [Job] pane

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch the [Account ID] button in the [Job] pane of print, copy and scan jobs. A numerical keyboard appears.

2. Enter the account ID for the current job (1 - 12 digits). Use the "C" button to correct a wrong entry.

3. Press [OK].

Enter an Account ID per Job

346 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver

Before you begin

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

To use the accounting function in the printer driver the [Enable accounting] setting in the [Properties] of the printer driver must be enabled.

In Microsoft Windows XP, for example, you must click Start -> Settings -> Printers and Faxes -> right-click your printer -> [Properties] -> tab that shows the name of your printer, to enable accounting.

NOTE The fixed account ID as defined on the operator panel overrules the account ID that is defined in the printer driver. Therefore, make sure that you cancel the fixed account ID before you print the job from the [Waiting jobs] section on the operator panel.

Procedure

1. In your application, click 'File' -> 'Print'. 2. If more printers are available, select the required printer from the list. 3. Click [Properties]. 4. Click [Account]. 5. Enter the [Account ID]. 6. Optionally, you can enter the name of the [Cost center] and any additional information in the

[Custom] field. 7. Click [OK].

NOTE When the [Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], automatic print jobs that do not have a valid account ID are automatically placed in the [Waiting jobs] section. You must enter a valid account ID to print the jobs.

Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver

Chapter 15 - Accounting 347 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver

348 Chapter 15 - Accounting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 16 Add Toner and Staples

Check the Status of the Toner Reservoir

Introduction

This section describes the following: Warnings when the toner level is low. Where to find the current filling level of the toner reservoir.

Toner Low Warnings

When the toner level is low, and toner is required, you will get the following warnings:

Filling level Warning

20% Dashboard: Orange warning icon, and a corresponding mes- sage.

Operator attention light: Orange lamp lights up.

0% Dashboard: Red warning icon, and a corresponding message. Operator attention light: Red lamp lights up.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Printer]. The [Supplies] pane displays the current filling level.

[70] Check the status of the toner reservoir

Check the Status of the Toner Reservoir

350 Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Add Toner

Introduction

When the control panel indicates that you must add toner, then you can add maximum two bottles of toner. Add the toner according to the instructions.

Only use genuine Canon toner to get the best print quality.

Product name Supported Canon toner

Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Toner Black

CAUTION Handle toner bottles carefully. Do not burn or throw used toner bottles into open flames, because this can ignite toner

residuals inside the toner bottles, which can cause burns or start a fire. Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to open flames, because this can ignite the

toner, which can cause burns or start a fire. If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, then carefully collect the toner particles or wipe them

up using a soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. If you use a vacuum cleaner to clean up spilled toner, only use a vacuum cleaner that has safeguards against dust explosions. The use of a vacuum cleaner without these safeguards can result in a malfunction of the vacuum cleaner, or a dust explosion due to static discharge.

Keep toner out of reach of children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately. Avoid breathing dust. Only use toner in environments with adequate ventilation.

IMPORTANT Only use toner bottles that are intended for use with this printer. Be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners are available on the market. The use of

counterfeit toners can result in a poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.

Store toner bottles in a cool and dry location, away from direct sunlight. It is recommended to store the toner at a temperature below 30 C (86 F) and a relative humidity below 80%.

Do not store toner bottles in an upright position. Do not add more toner than described in the table below. Before you use the toner bottle, shake the closed toner bottle well.

Maximum Amount of Toner to Be Added

Add toner

Icon Indicated % Description

100% The toner reservoir is filled for more than 60%. Do not add toner.

60% The toner reservoir is filled for 20%-60%. Do not add more than one bottle of toner.

4

Add Toner

Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples 351 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Icon Indicated % Description

20% The toner reservoir is filled for less than 20%. The printer can print another 600 sheets. Add maximum two bottles of toner as soon as possible.

0% The toner reservoir is empty. The printer stops. Add maximum two bottles of toner immediately to re- sume printing.

How to add toner

IMPORTANT Only add toner when the printer is ON.

Procedure

1. Open the cover of the toner reservoir in front of the control panel. 2. Put the toner bottle upside down into the toner reservoir. 3. Pull the slide to the right. 4. Wait until the toner bottle stops shaking, then push the slide to the left. 5. Remove the toner bottle. 6. Close the cover of the toner reservoir.

Add Toner

352 Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges

Introduction

The stacker/stapler can contain the following staplers: One stapler that can add one or two staples to non-booklet prints. These prints are delivered to

the upper or lower output tray. One stapler that can add two staples to booklets. These booklets are delivered to the booklet

tray. This stapler is only available when the stacker/stapler is equipped with the optional saddle stitch unit.

When all the staple cartridges are sufficiently filled, the staple icon in the dashboard is blue. When the staple icon in the dashboard is orange or red, one of the staple cartridges is empty or almost empty. You must refill the staple cartridge as soon as possible.

To find out which staple cartridge is empty or almost empty, you must go to the [Printer] section of the [System] view. The icon for the staple cartridge that must be refilled is orange or red.

NOTE Even when the staple icon is blue, you can still go to the [System] view to check the number of staples that has been used since the last refill.

The Colors of the Staple Icon

The colors of the staple icon

Staple icon Description

A blue staple icon indicates that all the staple cartridges contain suffi- cient staples.

An orange staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is al- most empty.

A red staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is empty. The printer stops when a job requires staples from the empty staple cartridge.

Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges

Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples 353 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[71] Check the status of the staple cartridges

Procedure

1. Check the staple icon in the dashboard. 2. When the staple icon is orange or red, go to the [Printer] section of the [System] view to check

which staple cartridge must be refilled.

Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges

354 Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit

Introduction

When a staple cartridge of the stapler unit inside the stacker/stapler is empty, the control panel will display a message indicating which staple cartridge must be replaced. The procedure below describes how to replace the staple cartridge.

Required tools

Staple N1

Replace the staple cartridge of the stapler unit

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the front door of the stacker/stapler.

2 Grab the green tab of the staple case and pull the staple case out of the staple unit.

NOTE When the stapler unit is at the back and it is difficult to pull out the staple case, turn the dial at the bottom left-hand side to the left to move the stapler unit.

3 Pull out the staple cartridge.

4 Insert the new staple cartridge (Staple N1).

4

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit

Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples 355 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

5 Gently push the staple case as far as pos- sible into the stapler unit until the staple case is securely in place.

6 Pull out the stapler waste box. The stapler waste box is located below the stapler unit.

7 Caution: Do not touch the staple waste. Empty the stapler waste box into a com- mon dustbin.

8 Put the stapler waste box back into place.

9 Caution: When you close the front door of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught, because this may re- sult in personal injury. Close the front door of the stacker/stapler.

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit

356 Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit

Introduction

When a staple cartridge of the saddle stitch unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AF2 is almost empty, the control panel will display a message indicating which staple cartridge must be replaced. The procedure below describes how to replace the staple cartridge.

NOTE This procedure is only necessary when the Saddle Finisher-AF2 is attached.

Required tools

Staple P1

Replace the staple cartridge of the saddle stitch unit

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the front door of the stacker/stapler.

2 Pull out the saddle stitch unit.

3 Grab the tab of the staple case and pull the staple case out of the staple unit.

4 Hold the cover of the staple case by its left and right sides Lift the cover and slide the cover off.

4

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit

Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples 357 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

5 Squeeze at the indicated positions to re- lease the empty staple cartridge. Lift the empty staple cartridge and pull the staple cartridge out.

6 Insert the new staple cartridge (Staple P1).

NOTE When you replace the staple cartridges, replace both the front and back staple cartridges.

7 Return the staple case to its original posi- tion in the saddle stitch unit. Make sure that the arrow on the staple case aligns with the arrow on the saddle stitch unit.

NOTE Follow the steps 3 to 7 to re- place the other staple cartridge in the saddle stitch unit.

8 Gently push the saddle stitch unit back in- to the printer.

9 Caution: When you close the front door of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught, because this may re- sult in personal injury. Close the front door of the stacker/stapler.

Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit

358 Chapter 16 - Add Toner and Staples Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 17 Cleaning

Clean the Scanner Sensors

When to do

When copies contain stains.

Required tools

Soft tissue

Clean the scanner sensors

Step Action Illustration

1 [Open the main cover.]

2 [Use a tissue to clean the scanner sensor.]

4

Clean the Scanner Sensors

360 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

3 [Open the white plate.]

4 [Open the lower right-hand guide.]

5 [Use a tissue to clean the scanner sensor.]

4

Clean the Scanner Sensors

Chapter 17 - Cleaning 361 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

6 [Close the lower right-hand guide.]

7 [Close the white plate.]

9 [Close the main cover.]

Clean the Scanner Sensors

362 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Clean the Z Sensor

When to do

In case of error code 16718.

Required tools

Soft tissue.

Clean the Z sensor

Step Action Illustration

1 [Open the front door.]

2 [Use handle 3 to slide out the transport unit.]

4

Clean the Z Sensor

Chapter 17 - Cleaning 363 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

3 [Use handle 4 to open the turn unit.]

4 [Use handle 5 to open the flap.]

5 [Use a tissue to clean the sensor and the sensor box on the inner side.]

6 [Close the flap.]

4

Clean the Z Sensor

364 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

7 [Use handle 4 to close the turn unit.]

8 [Use handle 3 to slide the transport unit back.]

9 [Close the front door.]

Clean the Z Sensor

Chapter 17 - Cleaning 365 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Manually Start a Drum Cleaning

Introduction

The cleaning procedure consists of the following steps: The drum cools down. The control panel indicates the time required. The drum is cleaned automatically. You cannot interrupt this action.

When to do

When the prints contain dots.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> [Clean the drum] -> [Start].

2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.] 3. Follow the instructions on the control panel.

Manually Start a Drum Cleaning

366 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Automatic Drum Cleaning

Introduction

The imaging drum inside the machine can get contaminated with glue spots. Glue spots on the drum can affect the print quality. Possible causes of the glue spots: The use of recycled media, or Wrapper glue residues on one or more sheets of paper.

The machine contains a sensor that can detect glue spots. When the [Automatic drum cleaning] setting is enabled, and spots are detected, an automatic drum cleaning procedure will take place.

NOTE When automatic drum cleaning is enabled, the cleaning will not take place before the first detection of glue spots. If you want to clean the drum immediately, you must start the manual drum cleaning procedure via the control panel ([System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> [Clean the drum] -> [Start]).

Precautions

Some contamination of the drum cannot be excluded completely, but you can take precautions to limit the possibility of contamination.

Advice: Open the wrapper very carefully, using a knife or scissors. Remove the top and bottom sheets of the paper package before you load the paper into a

paper tray. Use paper from a box.

Settings for Automatic Drum Cleaning

The control panel contains the following settings with regard to automatic drum cleaning.

Setting Description

[Automatic drum cleaning] Here you can enable or disable the automatic drum cleaning func- tion. When the setting is disabled, the drum is not cleaned automatical- ly. The settings described below in this table are grayed out on the control panel. If the setting is enabled, the sensor will frequently check the drum for glue spots ([Glue detection interval]). If necessary, the auto- matic drum cleaning procedure is performed. The three settings described below in this table are active. Possible values: [On] [Off]

Factory default value: [Off].

NOTE The drum cleaning can take a couple of minutes. The control panel provides feedback. 4

Automatic Drum Cleaning

Chapter 17 - Cleaning 367 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Description

[Glue detection interval] You can indicate the interval, in number of sides, after which the drum sensor checks the drum for glue spots. A lower value means that the sensor checks the drum more often. The frequency of the occurrence of glue spots depends highly on the media used. Possible values: [20 sides] [50 sides] [100 sides] [200 sides] [350 sides]

Factory default value: [350 sides].

NOTE A side is not necessarily equal to a sheet. A side is based on an image on A4/LTR-like media. An image is anything that is printed on one side of A4/LTR-like media. Below, you can find an example of the conversion for the [20 sides] value. At lower intervals, the productivity can decrease.

When A4/LTR is printed one-sided, then 20 sides = 20 sheets. When A4/LTR is printed two-sided, then 20 sides = 10 sheets. When A3/Tabloid is printed one-sided, then 20 sides = 10

sheets. When A3/Tabloid is printed two-sided, then 20 sides = 5 sheets.

So when you print A3/Tabloid two-sided, for example, the sensor checks the drum after every 5 sheets printed.

[Glue detection sensitivity] You can indicate the size of glue spots that the sensor detects. The factory default value makes sure that only fairly large spots will be detected. Only select a higher value when smaller glue spots must be detected. Possible values: [Normal] [High] [Very high]

Factory default value: [Normal].

[Resume automatically af- ter cleaning]

You can indicate the behavior of the printer after an automatic drum cleaning took place. Select [Yes] if you want to continue printing immediately, without checking the output first. Select [No] if you first want to check the prints that were made be- fore the drum cleaning. When the drum cleaning is ready, the con- trol panel displays a message that asks you if you want to contin- ue. Now you can check the output. Possible values: [Yes] [No]

Factory default value: [No]. 4

Automatic Drum Cleaning

368 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Setting Description

[Start of run detection] You can indicate if the system checks for glue pollution before the start of a run. Select [On] if you want the system to check for glue pollution be- fore the start of a run. Possible values: [On] [Off]

Factory default value: [Off].

NOTE It is advised that you enable [Start of run detection] only when you often use recycled media.

Advised settings for different types of users

Setting Normal user User that demands high quality

Plain paper Frequent use of recycled media

Plain paper Frequent use of recycled media

[Automatic drum cleaning]

[On] [On] [On] [On]

[Glue detection interval]

[350 sides] [350 sides] [100 sides] [100 sides]

[Glue detection sensitivity]

[Normal] [Normal] [Very high] [Very high]

[Resume auto- matically after cleaning]

[Yes] [Yes] [Yes] [Yes]

[Start of run de- tection]

[Off] [On] [Off] [On]

How to Change the Settings for Automatic Drum Cleaning

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]). 2. Touch the [Automatic drum cleaning] button to enable the setting. 3. If required, change the values of the settings described in the table. 4. Touch [Apply] to confirm the changes.

Automatic Drum Cleaning

Chapter 17 - Cleaning 369 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Automatic Drum Cleaning

370 Chapter 17 - Cleaning Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 18 Printer Operation Care (POC)

Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)

Introduction

Printer Operation Care (POC) is a concept that allows you to replace a number of parts yourself without the help of a service technician. This saves costs and improves the productivity.

The following actions are part of the POC concept: Replace the separation rollers in the paper trays. Replace the heat exchanger foils. Replace the spiral cleaner.

NOTE Removing paper from the TTF in case of a paper jam is also part of POC, because this requires the replacement of the spiral cleaner.

Which POC actions you can carry out depends on your service contract. When a POC action is not part of your service contract, you will get the message [Call Service] after you selected a maintenance action.

When maintenance is required, the dashboard will display an orange or red maintenance icon.

The maintenance icons

Icon Description

Maintenance is required soon. It is advised to start maintenance as soon as possible.

Maintenance is required now. The printer stops. The required mainte- nance must be carried out before you can resume printing.

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.

Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)

372 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[72] Start maintenance

Assistance on Printer Operation Care

You can find more assistance on how to replace the consumables at the following places: On the control panel. The control panel shows and describes the required actions step by step. In this User Manual.

Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 373 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Perform a Paper Path Registration

Introduction

NOTE Only trained operators who have permission to perform POC actions, and Service Technicians, are allowed to perform the paper path registration.

The paper path registration adjusts the registration for bulk media for printer-dependent offsets. Usually, the paper path registration is performed by a Service Technician at the installation or after a software upgradeThe paper path registration adjustment is a machine adjustment. The paper path registration is the basis of the media registration. The media-specific adjustment creates a difference with the bulk registration adjustment.

When to do

The Service Technician must perform the paper path registration adjustment after the replacement or disassembly of certain units.

After the trained operator replaced the heat exchanger foils, the trained operator must verify the media registration. If the media registration is not optimal, the paper path registration adjustment is required.

NOTE After the bulk registration adjustment, the media-specific registration can be changed. It is recommended to verify the media registration for the specific media. If the media registration is not satisfactory, the media specific registration is required.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> Printer registration adjustment A4/Letter -> [Start]. The tray for the A4/LTR bulk media is tray 1.

NOTE You must first perform the paper path registration adjustment for A4/LTR and after that you must perform the paper path registration adjustment for A3/Ledger.

NOTE When the optional bulk tray for small format is installed, make sure that bulk tray 1 contains A4 or Letter. Also, make sure that you have assigned A4 or Letter to bulk tray 1. If needed you must adjust the size of the tray (see Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format on page 71).

2. Enter the maintenance PIN

WARNING Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.

3. Follow the instructions on the screen. If the printer has not warmed up, the registration starts with warming up the printer.

Perform a Paper Path Registration

374 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

NOTE Make sure that the registration sheets are placed correctly in the left-hand upper corner of the glass plate. Make sure that the registration sheet on the glass plate is not curled or has dog ears. You can use a stack of paper to reduce the curl. You must close the ADF / cover for each scan.

The instructions for the paper path registration are the same as the instructions for the automatic media specific registration.

4. Repeat step 1, 2 and 3 for A3/Ledger. The tray for the A3/Ledger bulk media is tray 3.

After you finish

If the front-to-back side registration is not satisfactory after you performed the paper path registration, you must check the actual sheet length in the feed direction. The paper path registration assumes nominal sheet length. If the actual sheet length differs from the nominal sheet length, you must enter the actual sheet size (see Registration Values on page 98). If the media registration is not correct you must perform the manual media registration for this media (see Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases) on page 95).

NOTE Previously performed media specific registration can influence the media registration for bulk media. To verify the paper path registration, we therefore recommend to set all media specific registration settings to 0.

Perform a Paper Path Registration

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 375 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the Separation Rollers

When to do

The control panel will indicate when the separation rollers of a paper tray must be replaced. The life of separation rollers is more than 200,000 sheet separations.

Before you begin

1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch the tray of which you want to replace the separation rollers. 3. Touch [Open] to open the tray.

Required tools

Socket wrench

New separation rollers

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.

Illustration

[73] Required tools

Replace the separation rollers

Step Action Illustration

1 [Turn the upper separation roller until the roller is face up.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

376 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the bolt.]

3 [Remove the cover plate.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 377 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 [Remove the 3 fixation clips.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

378 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

5 [Remove the upper separation roller.]

6 [Push the lower separation roller down to remove the middle separation roller.]

7 [Remove the lower separation roller.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 379 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

8 [Place a new lower separation roller. Turn the roller into position.]

9 [Place a new middle separation roller. Turn the roller into position.]

10 [Place a new upper separation roller. Turn the roller into position.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

380 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

11 [Place the 3 fixation clips.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 381 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

12 [Place the cover plate back.]

13 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the cov- er plate.]

14 [Turn the upper separation roller back in- to position.]

4

Replace the Separation Rollers

382 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

15 Gently close the tray. It is advised to push at the centre of the tray.

Replace the Separation Rollers

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 383 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

Before you begin

NOTE This POC action is available, depending on the type of the heat exchanger foils.

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> [Replace the heat exchanger foils] -> [Start].

2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.] 3. [Touch Next to unlock the door.]

Required tools

Socket wrench

New heat exchanger foils

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.

Illustration

[74] Required tools

Replace the heat exchanger foils

Step Action Illustration

1 [Open the front door.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

384 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

2 [Use handle 3 to slide out the transport unit.]

3 [Use handle 4 to open the turn unit.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 385 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 [Remove the 2 plugs from the heat ex- changer.]

5 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2 fixation pens.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

386 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

6 [Use the red handle to remove the heat exchanger.]

7 [Place the heat exchanger on a clean, flat surface.]

8 [Turn the pressure plate over.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 387 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

9 [Remove the 2 heat exchanger foils.]

10 [Discard the foils into a common dustbin.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

388 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

11 [Place the wrapper with the new foils in the heat exchanger.]

12 [When the new foils are in place, remove the wrapper.] [Caution: Do not touch the foils to keep the new foils clean.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 389 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

13 [Turn the pressure plate back.]

14 [Place the heat exchanger back.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

390 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

15 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2 fixation pens.]

NOTE Push the fixation pens down during the fastening.

16 [Place the 2 plugs of the heat exchanger back.]

4

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 391 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

17 [Use handle 4 to close the turn unit.]

18 [Use handle 3 to slide the transport unit back.]

19 [Close the front door.]

20 Answer the question [Which heat ex- changer foils did you put back?] with [New] to confirm that you installed new heat exchanger foils. When you did not replace the heat ex- changer foils, touch [Existing].

Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils

392 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Introduction

When the spiral cleaner is almost full, the control panel displays the orange maintenance icon. The POC action [Replace the spiral cleaner] becomes active. The table below describes the meaning of the maintenance icons.

The maintenance icons

Icon Description

Maintenance is required soon. It is advised to replace the spiral cleaner as soon as possible. You can print about 45,000 more images before re- placing the spiral cleaner becomes required.

Maintenance is required now. The printer stops. You must replace the spiral cleaner to resume printing.

When to do

You can replace the spiral cleaner: Immediately or at a convenient time soon, when you cannot wait for the printer to cool down

(for example when your printer is in use 24/7), or During a cold start of the printer, for example the next morning when the printer was off or in

sleep mode during the night.

NOTE When the printer is shut down or put into sleep mode while the orange maintenance icon is displayed, you must replace the spiral cleaner at the next start-up. Then the red maintenance icon will be displayed.

Before you begin

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance] -> [Replace the spiral cleaner] -> [Start].

2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.] 3. [Touch Next to unlock the door.]

Wait until the printer is turned off. 4. Put on the heat-resistant gloves in case the machine is warm.

Required tools

Heat-resistant gloves

Socket wrench

New spiral cleaner

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 393 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Illustration

[75] Required tools

CAUTION You must wear the heat-resistant gloves when you replace the spiral cleaner and the printer is warm.

Replace the spiral cleaner

Step Action Illustration

1 [Open the front door.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

394 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2 fixation pens.]

3 [Turn the red handle counter-clockwise.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 395 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 [Slide the TTF unit out of the frame.]

5 [Pinch both fixation springs.]

6 [Slide the fixation caps from the cleaner ends.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

396 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

7 [Remove the spiral cleaner from the TTF.] [Place the spiral cleaner on the packaging of the new cleaner.]

NOTE [When the spiral cleaner has cooled down, discard the clean- er into a common dustbin.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 397 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

8 [Place the new spiral cleaner in the TTF.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

398 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

9 [Slide both fixation caps over the cleaner ends until the caps click in place.]

10 Check if the spiral cleaner can rotate free- ly.

11 [Align the TTF with the rail.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 399 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

12 [Slide the TTF unit back.]

13 [Turn the red handle clockwise.]

4

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

400 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

14 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2 fixation pens.]

15 [Close the front door.]

16 Answer the question [Which spiral clean- er did you put back?] with [New] to con- firm that you installed a new spiral clean- er. When you did not replace the spiral clean- er, touch [Existing].

Replace the Spiral Cleaner

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 401 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Remove Paper from the TTF

When to do

The control panel will indicate when paper must be removed from the TTF.

Before you begin

1. When the control panel displays the message [Touch Next to unlock the door.], touch [Next]. Wait until the printer is turned off.

2. Put on the heat-resistant gloves.

Required tools

Heat-resistant gloves

Socket wrench

New spiral cleaner

CAUTION You must wear heat-resistant gloves.

Illustration

[76] Required tools

CAUTION You must wear the heat-resistant gloves when you remove paper from the TTF.

Remove Paper from the TTF

402 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Remove paper from the TTF

Step Action Illustration

1 [Open the front door.]

2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2 fixation pens.]

3 [Turn the red handle counter-clockwise.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 403 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 [Slide the TTF unit out of the frame.]

5 [Pinch both fixation springs.]

6 [Slide the fixation caps from the cleaner ends.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

404 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

7 [Remove the spiral cleaner from the TTF.] [Place the spiral cleaner on the packaging of the new cleaner.]

NOTE [When the spiral cleaner has cooled down, discard the clean- er into a common dustbin.]

8 [Remove paper underneath the spiral cleaner.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 405 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

9 [Use handle 2 to open the flap and check for paper.]

10 [Remove sheets underneath the TTF.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

406 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

11 [Place the new spiral cleaner in the TTF.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 407 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

12 [Slide both fixation caps over the cleaner ends until the caps click in place.]

13 Check if the spiral cleaner can rotate free- ly.

14 [Align the TTF with the rail.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

408 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

15 [Slide the TTF unit back.]

16 [Turn the red handle clockwise.]

4

Remove Paper from the TTF

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 409 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

17 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2 fixation pens.]

18 [Close the front door.]

19 Answer the question [Which spiral clean- er did you put back?] with [New] to con- firm that you installed a new spiral clean- er. When you did not replace the spiral clean- er, touch [Existing].

Remove Paper from the TTF

410 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger

Required tools

Socket wrench

New heat exchanger foils

NOTE New heat exchanger foils are only needed with certain configurations. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Procedure

1. When the control panel displays the message [Touch Next to unlock the door.], touch [Next]. Wait until the printer is turned off.

2. Follow the instructions on the screen. The actions displayed on the screen, depend on the type of the heat exchanger foils.

Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 411 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1

Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit

When to do

Replace the four flip rings (indicated by (1) in the illustration below) when the stacking quality is not OK or when the flip rings are worn significantly. The flip rings are located behind the front cover.

Required tools

Four new flip rings

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out this action, if supported by your service organization.

Illustration

1

[77] The location of the flip rings

Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1

412 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Replace the flip rings

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the front cover.

2 If required, rotate the flip wheel to get ac- cess to the flip rings.

3 Put an A3/Tabloid sheet on the stack tray to prevent parts from falling into the stacker.

4

Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 413 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

4 Remove the flip rings one by one.

5 Place the new flip rings one by one. Check if the flip rings can rotate freely.

4

Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit

414 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

6 Remove the sheet from the stack tray.

7 Close the front cover.

Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 415 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit

When to do

A red LED lights up at the stacker control panel. The printer stops. The printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon . The printer control panel displays a message that indicates a paper jam in the lower input

paper path of the registration unit.

CAUTION When the lower input paper path of the registration unit also contains jammed paper, the printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon . In that case only trained personnel is allowed to remove the jammed paper.

Illustration

[78] Indication at the stacker control panel

Clear a paper jam in the lower input paper path of the registration unit

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the front door.

2 Caution: When you turn the knob, be careful not to get your fingers caught. Turn A7 to remove the jammed paper.

4

Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit

416 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

3 Remove the jammed paper from A6.

4 Lift the handle to open the paper path section.

5 Remove the jammed paper.

6 Caution: When you close the paper path section, be careful not to get your fingers caught. Lower the handle to close the paper path section.

7 Close the front door.

8 The control panel will display the mes- sage [Did you remove all sheets from the paper path?] Touch [Yes] to confirm that all paper was removed.

Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 417 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

When to do

A red LED lights up at the stacker control panel. The printer stops and the printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon . The printer control panel displays a message that indicates a paper jam in the registration unit.

Required tools

Socket wrench 5.5

CAUTION Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out this action, if supported by your service organization.

Illustration

[79] Indication at the stacker control panel

Clear a paper jam in the registration unit

Step Action Illustration

1 Open the top cover.

4

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

418 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

2 Open B2 to remove the jammed paper.

3 Caution: When you close the top cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught. Close the top cover.

4 Open the front door.

4

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 419 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

5 Use the socket wrench to loosen the screw and open the cover.

6 Open the 2 retaining clips and disconnect the flat cable.

4

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

420 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

7 Attention: Do not pull the flat cable. Pull out the registration unit.

8 Remove any pieces of paper from the reg- istration unit.

9 Place the registration unit back. The ar- rows must be on top.

4

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) 421 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Step Action Illustration

10 Attention: Do not twist the flat cable. Connect the flat cable and close the 2 re- taining clips.

11 Close the cover and use the socket wrench to fasten the screw.

12 Close the front door.

13 The printer control panel will display the message [Did you remove all sheets from the paper path?]. Touch [Yes] to confirm that all paper was removed.

Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit

422 Chapter 18 - Printer Operation Care (POC) Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 19 Troubleshooting

Solving Errors

Introduction

The main types of possible errors are the following. Errors that relate to the machine Errors that relate to the jobs

This section gives an overview of the possible errors and the solutions to these errors.

NOTE Only operators who received the special maintenance training are allowed to replace or clean parts and solve paper jams in the process units.

Overview of Possible Machine Errors

Handle machine errors

Error Solution Additional information

Paper jam Follow the instructions on the control panel.

After you solved the error, the machine starts from the point where the printing stopped due to the error. Check for double prints.

Software error Follow the instructions on the control panel.

A message on the control panel will indicate that you must restart the machine.

Service required Follow the instructions on the control panel.

A message on the control panel will indicate that you must contact Service or your local au- thorized dealer.

Unit recondition- ing

Follow the instructions on the control panel.

After an error was solved, the machine checks if the print job can continue from the point where the printing stopped. When you use cy- clic media, you must probably remove a cou- ple of sheets.

The system can- not determine if the output is complete

Follow the instructions on the control panel and check the output.

Sometimes, the system cannot determine if the output is complete. Then you must check the output. Touch the [OK] button when the output is complete.

The prints con- tain dots

Carry out the drum clean- ing procedure.

On the control panel, you can start this proce- dure by touching [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Start maintenance].

A paper tray does not open

Check if all paper trays are closed correctly.

Paper jams or dog ears because the horizontal transport unit in- side the printer is not closed com- pletely.

Make sure that the horizon- tal transport unit is always completely pushed in until locked.

Solving Errors

424 Chapter 19 - Troubleshooting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Overview of Possible Job Errors

Handle job errors

Error Solution Additional information

The required sup- plies are not available

Add the required supplies (media, toner and staples) before the machine stops printing.

The dashboard helps you to determine when the supplies are required.

The defined com- bination of job settings is not possible

The controller corrects the settings.

You must define a cor- rect combination of job settings in the [Proper- ties] section of the [Jobs] view on the con- trol panel.

The solution depends on the place where the job settings are defined. When the job settings are defined in an ap-

plication or printer driver, the controller au- tomatically corrects the settings.

When you define the job settings on the control panel, the control panel displays a message that the defined combination is not possible. The [OK] button is disabled.

Solving Errors

Chapter 19 - Troubleshooting 425 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Store the logging in case of software errors

Introduction

When the system has a software error, you can store the logging. Service can use this logging to analyse the error.

Procedure

1. On the control panel an error screen is visible that indicates a software error. A software error has an error code that starts with 115. The system creates a log. This may take a few minutes. After the creation of the log is complete, you can insert a USB drive into the USB port at the left- hand side of the control panel. When you do not want to store the logging of the software error, you can touch the error screen to exit the error. The system restarts. Only non-recoverable software errors will store the error log.

2. Touch the USB drive button on the error screen. The systems stores the logging of the error on the USB drive.

3. When the systems indicates that the storing is completed, remove the USB drive. 4. Touch the error screen to exit the error. The system restarts.

NOTE When the system has two identical software errors after each other, you can delete all jobs. If one or more jobs caused the software error, the system restarts without an error.

NOTE If the system experiences three identical software errors, one after another the system reinstalls the software upon restarting. Reinstallation will take a while.

Store the logging in case of software errors

426 Chapter 19 - Troubleshooting Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Chapter 20 Software upgrade

Upgrade PRISMAsync from server

Introduction

You can update the printer with the latest PRISMAsync software that is available at the printer dealer. The printer dealer stores the software at a server.

Before you begin

Remote Service must be available.

Procedure

NOTE You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.

1. Access the Settings Editor. 2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates]. 3. In the [PRISMAsync upgrades] section, click [Upgrade from server]. Select the available version.

When no version is visible, the printer dealer has made no version available. 4. After you downloaded the version, you must install this version. 5. When the upgrade is completed you must restart the system.

Upgrade PRISMAsync from server

428 Chapter 20 - Software upgrade Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Upgrade PRISMAsync

Introduction

You can upgrade or downgrade the printer with the PRISMAsync software that is available on the system.

Procedure

NOTE You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.

1. Access the Settings Editor. 2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates]. 3. In the section [PRISMAsync upgrades] click [Upgrade]. Select the available version.

When no version is visible, the printer dealer has made no version available. 4. After you downloaded the version, you must install this version.

NOTE After you upgraded the software, you can downgrade to the previous installed version. In the section [PRISMAsync upgrades] click [Downgrade].

5. You must restart the system once the the upgrade or downgrade is complete.

Upgrade PRISMAsync

Chapter 20 - Software upgrade 429 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Upgrade Microsoft Windows

Introduction

You can update the printer with the latest upgrade of Microsoft Windows.

Before you begin

You must download the Microsoft Windows upgrade before you can upgrade Microsoft Windows.

Procedure

NOTE You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.

1. Access the Settings Editor. 2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates]. 3. In the [Windows updates] section, click [Install]. Browse to the Microsoft Windows upgrade you

downloaded. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to upload the required files. 5. When the upgrade is completed you must restart the system.

Upgrade Microsoft Windows

430 Chapter 20 - Software upgrade Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Appendix A Specifications

General

Specifications

Specification Value

Description Light to mid production, B&W printer / scanner / copier

Required toner Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Toner Black

Imaging technology DirectPress; mono-component toner

Warm-up time 150-270 seconds, depending on amount of toner in cleaner

First copy time One-sided: 3.9 seconds

First print time One-sided, ripped: 5.1 seconds

Printer dimensions Excluding operator panel: 1,130 mm x 765 mm x 1,040 mm (44.5" x 30.1" x 40.9") Including operator panel: 1,130 mm x 765 mm x 1,430 mm (44.5" x 30.1" x 56.3")

Printer weight 263 kg (578.6 lb)

Power requirement 1-Phase: 200-240 V, 50/60 Hz USA 20 A (16 A rated) USA 15 A (12 A rated)

Certificates EPA Energy Star / TEC compliancy, RoHS, Cetecom / CE Class A, FCC Class A, UL / TV / CE

General

432 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Environmental

Specification Description

Ozone emis- sions

None (printer)

Optimum tem- perature

17-30 C (62.6-86 F), printer up to 34 C (93.2 F). For accessories, refer to their specifications.

Relative humid- ity

20-80%

Altitude Lower than 1,000 m (3,281 ft)

Room ventila- tion

35 m3 or > 1 AC/hour for room sizes > 35 m3

Sound power level

Standby mode: 47.3 dB Print mode: maximum 75.3 dB

Power con- sumption

Off mode: 0.3 W Sleep mode: 4 W (excluding controller) Low power mode: 210 W Ready mode: 275 W Operation mode (USA, LTR, 20 lb bond, two-sided): 1.85 kW / 1.9 kW / 2.1 kW (varioPRINT 110 / 120 / 135 respectively)

TEC value USA, LTR, 20 lb bond: 18.9 kWh / 20.0 kWh / 22.4 kWh (varioPRINT 110 / 120 / 135 respectively)

Environmental

Appendix A - Specifications 433 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printer Speed Below you find the maximum engine speeds in images per minute.

Printing, media weight

Speed li cense

B5, A4 (8.5 x 11"), A5 (5.5 x 8.5")

Letter Tabloid A3 SRA3

Two-sided, less than 120 g/m (32 lb bond)

110 113 110 57 59 55

120 123 120 63 64 60

135 138 135 70 72 68

One-sided, less than 220 g/m (80 lb cover)

110 102 100 52 53 50

120 113 110 57 59 55

135 123 120 63 64 60

Two-sided, 120 g/m - 220 g/m (32 lb bond - 80 lb cover)

110 102 100 52 53 50

120 113 110 57 59 55

135 123 120 63 64 60

> 220 g/m (80 lb cover)

110 61 60 31 32 30

120 61 60 31 32 30

135 61 60 31 32 30

Printer Speed

434 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Paper Modules

Internal Paper Module

NOTE Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned in the table below, the figure is based on media of 80 g/m (20 lb bond).

Specification Description

Description Standard paper module

Paper trays Bulk tray 1: 1,500 sheets (A4, JIS B5, Letter, 16K. When the bulk tray for small format is installed also A5, Statement.)

Bulk tray 2: 1,500 sheets (A4, JIS B5, Letter, 16K. When the bulk tray for small format is installed also A5, Statement.)

Multi-size tray 3: 500 sheets; 140 mm x 182 mm - 320 mm x 432 mm (5.5" x 7.2" - 12.6" x 17.0")

Multi-size tray 4: 500 sheets; 140 mm x 182 mm - 320 mm x 488 mm (5.5" x 7.2" - 12.6" x 19.2")

Paper weight 50 - 300 g/m (14 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

Detection Automatic paper size detection (multi-size tray), tray-empty detec- tion

Paper feed technology Friction feed

Features Paper Logic, tray linking, paper level indication, on-the-fly loading, tab sheet processing

External Paper Module

Specification Description

Description Optional paper module. The bulk trays three and four can be equipped with dual paper trays (optional).

Dimensions (WxDxH) 980 mm x 750 mm x 1,040 mm (38.6" x 29.5" x 40.9")

Weight 200 kg (441 lb)

Power supply 90-264 V, 40-67 Hz, 200 W

Paper trays Tray 1: 600 sheets Tray 2: 600 sheets Tray 3: 1,700 sheets; dual paper tray: 3,300 sheets (A4, LTR) Tray 4: 1,700 sheets; dual paper tray: 3,300 sheets (A4, LTR)

Paper size All paper trays: 203 mm x 203 mm - 320 mm x 488 mm (8.0" x 8.0" - 12.6" x 19.2"), JIS B5 LEF, including custom sizes

Paper weight 50 - 300 g/m (14 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

Detection Automatic paper size detection, tray-empty detection, double- sheet detection

Paper feed technology Vacuum feed, air separation 4

Paper Modules

Appendix A - Specifications 435 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Specification Description

Features Paper Logic, tray linking, paper level indication, on-the-fly loading, tab sheet processing, optional JIS B5 tool

Paper Modules

436 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Media Specifications

Media Types

Media Description

Transparencies Only paperbacked and printed one-sided

Tabs Yes

Self adhesives Yes

Textured paper Yes

Die cuts Yes

NCR paper On media recommended by the manufacturer

Pre-printed paper According to the manufacturer's guidelines for pre-printed media

Recycled paper On media recommended by the manufacturer

Media Weights

Media Internal paper module External paper module

Plain paper 60 - 200 g/m (16 lb bond - 74 lb cover)

60 - 200 g/m (16 lb bond - 74 lb cover)

Plain paper recommended by the manufacturer

50 - 300 g/m (14 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

50 - 300 g/m (14 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

Offset media 80 - 200 g/m (20 lb bond - 74 lb cover)

80 - 200 g/m (20 lb bond - 74 lb cover)

Offset media recommen- ded by the manufacturer

60 - 300 g/m (16 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

60 - 300 g/m (16 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

Coated media No* 120 - 200 g/m (32 lb bond - 74 lb cover)

Coated media recommen- ded by the manufacturer

No* 80 - 300 g/m (20 lb bond - 110 lb cover)

NOTE * Some coated media can be used when you install the separation enhancer.

Media Specifications

Appendix A - Specifications 437 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printing, Copying and Scanning

Printing

Specification Description

Job management DocBox, lists of [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and [Printed jobs]

Print resolution PCL: 600 x 600 dpi Adobe PostScript 3: 1200x1200 dpi, 600x2400 dpi

Engine resolution 600x2400 dpi

Maximum printable area PCL: adjustable Adobe PostScript 3: 3 mm from side, maximum 308 mm x 484 mm (12.1" x 19")

Screen frequency PCL: 106 lpi maximum Adobe PostScript 3: 200 lpi maximum

Gray levels PCL: 125 Adobe PostScript 3: 200

Features RIP at rated printer speed, pre-RIP, print-while-RIP-while-spool (streaming), printing multiple sizes, hotfolders/automated work- flows, optional transaction printing

Copying

Specification Description

Copy resolution 600x1200 dpi

Exposure control Auto / Manual (9-step scale), [Text], [Mixed], [Photo], [High detail]

Zoom 25-400%; automatic

Screen frequency 200 lpi

Gray levels 200

Features Automatic quality optimization for text/photo, light/dark setting, cover insertion, [Combined copy job], automatic rotation, booklet printing, multiple images per sheet, margin shift, margin erase, image position, automatic paper selection, tab copying, combina- tion of different original sizes.

Scanning

Specification Description

Resolution 75, 100, 150, 200, 300 (default), 600 dpi

Pull scan Not available

Color scanning Optional license

Destination Scan to email, Scan to FTP, Scan to USB, Scan to DocBox, Scan to SMB 4

Printing, Copying and Scanning

438 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Specification Description

File format PDF (single and multiple page), PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG/sRBG (colour scanning)

Features Thumbnail preview (DocBox), scan profiles, status overview, gray level scanning, scan once print many, scan-in-warmup, scan- while-print, subset-scanning, multi-tasking user interface, RGB col- or scanning

Printing, Copying and Scanning

Appendix A - Specifications 439 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

PRISMAsync Controller

Specification Description

Description PRISMAsync, embedded, with optional removable hard disk. Web- based configuration with Settings Editor.

Processor 2 GHz

Memory 2 GB

Hard disk Minimum 160 GB

Network connectivity 10/100/1000 Base-T

Network protocols TCP/IP (LPR/LPD, socket), SMB static/auto IP (via DHCP) SNMP v1-v3 (printer MIB, private MIB, job monitoring MIB) IPv4 & IPv6

Operating system Microsoft Windows 7

Page Description Languag- es

PostScript 3, PDF 1.7, PCL 6, XPS, IPDS

USB printing PDF, PS, PCL, XPS via USB connection on operator panel

Security Common Criteria EAL2+, E-shredding, HTTPs, Firewall, PIN for DocBox, User authentication to SDS, removable hard disk, IPv6

Features Print while RIP, streaming, multi-job processing, pre-RIP, no cycle- down between jobs, multi-tasking (scan/copy/print), Remote meter reading, Remote Diagnostics, remote software upgrade

Hardware options Generic USB mouse support, Section 508 kit (video, attention sig- nal), copy control device interface for accounting, operator atten- tion light, removable hard disk, Remote Monitor

PRISMAsync Controller

440 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printer Driver Support

Printer driver Remark

PS3 UPD - Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2

32 & 64-bit support

PS3 UPD - Microsoft Windows Client XP/Vista/ Windows7

32 & 64-bit support

PS3 PPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/ Linux-CUPS/Other

PS3 - Macintosh (Mac OS 10.4/10.5/10.6) Intel & PowerPC

PCL6 UPD - Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2

32 & 64-bit support

PCL6 UPD - Microsoft Windows Client XP/ Vista/Windows 7

32 & 64-bit support

PCL6 GPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/ Linux-CUPS/Other

Microsoft XPS UPD - Microsoft Windows Client Vista/Windows 7

32 & 64-bit support

SAP Device Type (SAP R/3 4.6 and higher) Implementation & support via C&SS

NOTE All UPD drivers are Microsoft certified

Printer Driver Support

Appendix A - Specifications 441 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printer Driver Support

442 Appendix A - Specifications Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Index

1

1-sided media Media registration..........................................119

11504..................................................................... 426

A

Access other functions during copy job or scan job.......................................................................... 217 Accessories

Commercial naming........................................ 12 Generic naming................................................12

accid.csv file..........................................................336 Account ID file

Content............................................................335 Download........................................................336 Edit.................................................................. 336 Upload.............................................................336

Account ID Clear account ID............................................. 344 Fixed................................................................344 Per job.............................................................344

Account log file Description of the data records.....................337 General information.......................................337 Name...............................................................337

Accounting mode................................................. 344 Accounting

Enable identification...................................... 334 Enable verification......................................... 334 Fields of the account log file......................... 337 Printer driver...................................................347

Actual sheet size..................................................... 98 Add temporary media to the Media catalog........ 62 Add toner.............................................................. 351 Add

Automated workflow..................................... 181 Address list file

Download........................................................254 Edit.................................................................. 254 Records........................................................... 254 Upload.............................................................254

Advanced media settings Paper quality factor..........................................79 Pre-printed mode............................................. 75 Wax mode.........................................................77

Advanced settings.................................................. 95 Alignment..............................................................165 Assign media to paper tray

Trays view.........................................................60 Automated settings

Copy job..........................................................218 Scan job.......................................................... 261

Automated workflow Add..................................................................181 Delete.............................................................. 183 Edit.................................................................. 182 Restore default............................................... 184

Automated workflows Attributes........................................................ 178 Explanation.....................................................178

Automatic drum cleaning.................................... 367 Automatic media registration..........................88, 91 Available user documentation.............................. 13

B

Basic copy............................................................. 235 Billing counters

Description......................................................328 Print the report............................................... 330

Binding edge.........................................................162 Booklet tray............................................................. 27 Brightness

Darker prints...................................................169 Lighter prints.................................................. 169

Bulk media............................................................ 374 Bundle print jobs.................................................. 153 Bundled jobs

Change job settings....................................... 153

C

Change Alignment....................................................... 165 Binding edge.................................................. 162 Check first set................................................. 174 Finishing method........................................... 171 Image shift......................................................166 Language.......................................................... 47 Margin shift.................................................... 166 Media.............................................................. 163 Number of sets...............................................173

Index

443 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Offset stacking................................................167 Output location...............................................167 Page range......................................................175 Print order.......................................................167 Rotation...........................................................167 Separator sheets............................................ 176 Settings for covers.........................................164 settings on page level....................................177 Sheet order.....................................................167 Sheet orientation............................................167 Sort by page................................................... 167 Sort by set.......................................................167 Warning time....................................................48

Check first set........................................................174 Check

Staple cartridges............................................ 353 Toner level......................................................350

Clean the drum automatically............................. 367 Clean the drum manually.................................... 366 Clean Z sensor...................................................... 363 Clean

Drum....................................................... 366, 367 Color profiles........................................................ 169 Combine analog documents............................... 275 Combine subsets

Create 1 document.........................................242 Create 1 file.....................................................275 Create one file................................................ 275

Components Booklet Trimmer-D1.........................................16 Decurler.............................................................16 Decurler Unit-A1...............................................16 Document Insertion Unit-F1............................ 16 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-D1.............. 16 External paper module.................................... 16 Finisher-AF1/Saddle Finisher-AF2.................. 16 Folder................................................................ 16 High Capacity Stacker-E1................................ 16 High Capacity Stacker-F1.................................16 Inserter..............................................................16 Internal paper module..................................... 16 Operator attention light................................... 16 Operator panel................................................. 16 Paper Folding Unit-F1......................................16 Perfect Binder-C1............................................. 16 Printer module..................................................16 Scanner.............................................................16 Stacker.............................................................. 16 Stacker/stapler..................................................16 Trimmer............................................................ 16 Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1...................... 16

Configure LDAP server....................................................253 Scan-to-email function.................................. 252

Scan-to-file function.......................................250 Scan-to-SMB function....................................251

Connectivity DNS settings.....................................................38 IPv6 settings..................................................... 38 WINS settings...................................................38

Connectivity Default gateway............................................... 38 DHCP................................................................. 38 DNS 1................................................................ 38 DNS 2................................................................ 38 DNS suffix follows domain............................. 38 Host name.........................................................38 Link speed and connection type..................... 38 MAC address.................................................... 38 Primary DNS suffix.......................................... 38 Subnet mask.....................................................38 TCP/IP................................................................38 Test TCP/IP connection.................................... 38 WINS 1.............................................................. 38 WINS 2.............................................................. 38

Contrast Decrease......................................................... 169 Increase...........................................................169

Control panel Accounting mode...........................................344 Brightness.........................................................51 Clean................................................................. 19 Contrast.............................................................51 Enter an account ID per job...........................346 Main components............................................ 19 Manual media registration.............................. 96 Media registration......................................91, 93 Overview...........................................................19

Conversion table for commercial names and user interface names...................................................... 12 Copy function

Introduction.................................................... 210 Copy job

Align................................................................225 Automated settings........................................218 Binding............................................................230 Binding edge.................................................. 222 Covers............................................................. 223 Destination......................................................234 Exposure.........................................................230 Folding options.............................................. 230 Image type......................................................221 Job name........................................................233 Job settings.................................................... 218 Layout............................................................. 224 Margin erase...................................................229 Media.............................................................. 222 Number of sets...............................................233

Index

444 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Offset stacking................................................227 Original 1- or 2-sided..................................... 219 Original type...................................................220 Output 1- or 2-sided....................................... 221 Output location...............................................227 Print delivery.................................................. 227 Print order.......................................................227 Punching.........................................................232 Rename...........................................................241 Rotation...........................................................227 Separator sheets............................................ 234 Sheet order.....................................................227 Sheet orientation............................................227 Shift.................................................................226 Size..................................................................220 Sort by page................................................... 227 Sort by set.......................................................227 Staples............................................................ 230 Trimming........................................................ 231 Zoom...............................................................224

Copy jobs Access other functions.................................. 217 Combined copy job........................................242 Minimize......................................................... 217 Zoom...............................................................238

Copy templates.............................................236, 274 Copy to.................................................................. 190 Copy

media catalog...................................................81 Non-standard size originals.......................... 237 Scan now, print later......................................245

Counters................................................................ 328 Large media....................................................328 Standard media..............................................328

Covers....................................................................164 Create a DocBox................................................... 282 Create

Hotfolder.........................................................187 Hotfolder default ticket.................................. 189

D

Dashboard...............................................................21 Date and time..........................................................39 Day counters

Description......................................................328 Reset................................................................329

Deep sleep mode....................................................30 Default gateway......................................................38 Define job settings

Hotfolder.........................................................189 Define print job settings

Automated workflow..................................... 122 Control panel..................................................122

Hotfolder.........................................................122 Job ticket.........................................................122 PDL default settings.......................................122 PDL job settings............................................. 122

Define Finishing method........................................... 172

Delete jobs All jobs............................................................ 131 DocBox............................................................131 Jobs with available media.............................131 Jobs with label............................................... 131 List of Printed jobs......................................... 131 List of Scheduled jobs................................... 131 List of Waiting jobs........................................ 131 New jobs.........................................................131 One by one..................................................... 131 Printed jobs.....................................................131

Delete Automated workflow..................................... 183

DHCP........................................................................38 Diamond shape adjust......................... 106, 107, 108 Diamond shape image......................... 106, 107, 108 Disable

Warning time....................................................49 DNS 1.......................................................................38 DNS 2.......................................................................38 DNS settings........................................................... 38 DNS suffix follows domain....................................38 DocBox job

1- or 2-sided....................................................284 Align................................................................288 Binding............................................................295 Binding edge.................................................. 285 Brightness.......................................................293 Check first set................................................. 298 Color profile....................................................293 Contrast...........................................................293 Covers............................................................. 286 Edit.................................................................. 299 Exposure.........................................................292 Fattening.........................................................293 Folding............................................................ 295 Job name........................................................298 Layout............................................................. 287 Line width....................................................... 293 Margin erase...................................................292 Media.............................................................. 285 Minimum line width.......................................293 Number of sets...............................................298 Offset stacking................................................290 Output location...............................................290 Page range......................................................298 Print order.......................................................290 Punching.........................................................297

Index

445 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

RIP raster.........................................................293 RIP resolution................................................. 293 Rotation...........................................................290 Separator sheets............................................ 298 Sheet order.....................................................290 Sheet orientation............................................290 Shift.................................................................289 Sort by page................................................... 290 Sort by set.......................................................290 Staples............................................................ 295 Trimming........................................................ 296 Zoom...............................................................287

DocBox Build function................................................. 301 Combine jobs................................................. 301 Create..............................................................282 Interrupt function........................................... 307 Introduction.................................................... 280 Job settings.................................................... 283 Lock settings...................................................303 Print a job........................................................306 Print an urgent job......................................... 307 Split a built job............................................... 302 Split function.................................................. 302 Unlock settings...............................................304 Urgent jobs.....................................................307

Dots on prints............................................... 366, 367 Download

Automatically................................................... 37 Drum cleaning.............................................. 366, 367 Dual paper tray....................................................... 23

E

Edit Automated workflow..................................... 182

Elongation....................................................... 99, 100 Email......................................................................270 Enable remote connection...................................321 Errors

Job errors....................................................... 424 Machine errors............................................... 424

F

FAQ Media registration..........................................119

Fattening............................................................... 169 Finisher-AF1............................................................ 27 Finisher

Finisher-AF1......................................................27 Saddle Finisher-AF2.........................................27

Finishing method..........................................171, 172 Flip rings................................................................412

Front-to-back side...................98, 102, 103, 111, 112

G

Generic naming in User Interfaces....................... 12 Generic naming of accessories............................. 12 Green button copy................................................235

H

Host name............................................................... 38 Hotfolder

Activate........................................................... 186 Create..............................................................187 Create shared network drive.........................188 Default ticket...................................................189 Define job settings......................................... 189 Drag & drop....................................................185 General information.......................................185 Job settings.................................................... 185 Job ticket.........................................................185 Link to automated workflow......................... 187

I

Image shift............................................................ 166 Back.................................................................111 Front................................................................111 Preprinted media............................................114 Transaction printing.......................................196 X...................................................................... 111 Z.......................................................................111

Install Windows...........................................................37

Install.......................................................... 37 Internal bulk trays

Supported media types................................... 54 IPDS

Output recovery............................................. 202 IPv6 settings............................................................38

J

JIS B5 adapter Place..................................................................73 Remove.............................................................73

Job management other printer....................................................190

Job name Truncate............................................................50

Job settings Copy job..........................................................218 DocBox............................................................283 Hotfolder.........................................................185 Print job...........................................................132

Index

446 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Scan job.......................................................... 261 Job ticket............................................................... 155 Job

Change alignment..........................................165 Change binding edge.....................................162 Change finishing method.............................. 171 Change number of sets................................. 173 Change settings for covers............................164 Change the media..........................................163 Check the first set...........................................174 Give priority....................................................149 Make a proof...................................................156 Print later........................................................ 150 Print the job parameters................................155 Reprint.............................................................151 Separator sheets............................................ 176 Shift the image...............................................166 Shift the margin............................................. 166 To top..............................................................149

Jobs with available media................................... 152 Jobs with label......................................................152

K

Key operator settings............................................. 37

L

Label...................................................................... 152 Language.................................................................47 Layout

Booklet............................................................ 136 Multiple up......................................................136 Normal............................................................ 136 Same up..........................................................136 Same-up flipped.............................................136

LDAP server.......................................................... 253 Link speed and connection type............................38 Load media

Schedule view................................................ 160 Lock settings in DocBox.......................................303 Logging

Printing the Configuration Report.................. 38 Save the datadump file....................................38 Save the trace file.............................................38 Save the zipped log file................................... 38 Software error................................................ 426

Low power mode....................................................30

M

MAC address...........................................................38 Main parts............................................................... 25 Make a proof......................................................... 156 Manual drum cleaning......................................... 366

Manual media registration.............................. 88, 95 Margin shift...........................................................166 Media catalog......................................................... 54

copy...........................................................81, 119 PRISMAprepare..............................................125

Media handling Description........................................................54

Media in bulk trays................................................. 39 Media registration

1-sided media.................................................119 Advanced settings............................................95 Automatic......................................................... 91 Control panel........................................91, 93, 96 Diamond shape image...................106, 107, 108 Elongation.................................................99, 100 FAQ..................................................................119 Front-to-back side............ 98, 102, 103, 111, 112 Manual.............................................................. 95 Order................................................................. 88 Preprinted media............................................116 Quick start.........................................................85 Settings Editor................................................113 Shifted image......................................... 102, 103 Skewed image................................109, 110, 111 Standard settings.............................................95 Temporary media...........................................119 Trapezoid shape image......................... 105, 106 Troubleshooting.............................................116 Verification........................................................89 Verification chart..............................................89

Media Bulk..................................................................374 Icons..................................................................57 Information.......................................................57 Preprinted....................................................... 114 Specific..............................................................88

Microsoft Windows Upgrade.......................................................... 430

Minimum line width............................................. 169 Move a job from Scheduled jobs to Waiting jobs... 150

N

Naming of accessories...........................................12 New

Scan to file......................................................269 Non-standard size originals.................................237 Number of sets..................................................... 173

O

Offset stacking...................................................... 167 Changes in the Properties window...............168

Index

447 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Types...............................................................168 Offset

X.............................................................. 102, 103 Z...............................................................102, 103

On/Off button.......................................................... 30 One-sided printing................................................161 Operator attention light......................................... 26 Optimize the scan quality.................................... 276 Options.................................................................... 88 Order........................................................................88 Orientation of originals

In the ADF....................................................... 212 On the glass plate.......................................... 212

Output recovery....................................................202

P

Page programming.............................................. 177 Page range

All pages......................................................... 175 Indicate the range.......................................... 175

Page view.............................................................. 177 Paper dust............................................................... 79 Paper jam

In the registration unit................................... 418 Lower input paper path of registration unit.416

Paper module External paper module.................................... 23 Internal paper module..................................... 23

Paper path registration........................................ 374 Paper quality factor................................................ 79 Paper tray icons...................................................... 57 Place the originals................................................ 213 POC........................................................................ 118

Paper path registration..................................374 Postponed copying...............................................245 Power modes

Deep sleep mode............................................. 30 Low power mode............................................. 30 Off......................................................................30 Ready................................................................ 30 Sleep mode.......................................................30

Pre-printed media...................................................75 Pre-printed mode....................................................75 Pre-requisites.......................................................... 88 Preprinted media.................................................. 114

Media registration..........................................116 Primary DNS suffix.................................................38 Print a job from USB drive...................................127 Print a job

Printer driver...................................................124 Print a scheduled job later................................... 150 Print an urgent job

DocBox............................................................307

Print color images on a B&W printer..................169 Print delivery settings

Offset stacking................................................167 Output location...............................................167 Print order.......................................................167 Rotation...........................................................167 Sheet order.....................................................167 Sheet orientation............................................167 Sort by page................................................... 167 Sort by set.......................................................167

Print job 1- or 2-sided....................................................133 Align................................................................137 Binding............................................................143 Binding edge.................................................. 134 Brightness.......................................................141 Check first set................................................. 146 Color profile....................................................141 Contrast...........................................................141 Covers............................................................. 135 Define finishing method................................ 172 Fattening.........................................................141 Folding............................................................ 172 Folding options.............................................. 143 Job name........................................................146 Job settings.................................................... 132 Line width....................................................... 141 Media.............................................................. 134 Minimum line width.......................................141 Number of sets...............................................146 Offset stacking................................................139 Output location...............................................139 Page range......................................................146 Print order.......................................................139 Punching.........................................................145 RIP raster.........................................................141 RIP resolution................................................. 141 Rotation...........................................................139 Separator sheets............................................ 146 Sheet order.....................................................139 Sheet orientation............................................139 Shift.................................................................138 Sort by page................................................... 139 Sort by set.......................................................139 Staples............................................................ 143 Trimming................................................ 144, 172

Print jobs Bundle several jobs........................................153 Split bundled jobs.......................................... 153

Print the configuration report................................38 Printer driver

Enable accounting..........................................347 Get the latest version.....................................124 Use accounting...............................................347

Index

448 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Printer speed.........................................................434 Print

All jobs............................................................ 152 Job parameters.............................................. 155 Job settings.................................................... 155 Jobs in list of Waiting jobs............................147 Jobs with available media.............................152 Jobs with label............................................... 152 Urgent job.......................................................148

Priority for a job....................................................149 PRISMAprepare

Job preparation..............................................125 PRISMAsync Remote Manager........................... 325 PRISMAsync

Upgrade.......................................................... 429 Upgrade from server..................................... 428

Puncher unit............................................................27 Puncher waste tray.................................................27

Q

Quick start Media registration............................................85

R

Registration sheet.............................................91, 93 Remote connection enabled..................................38 Remote connection status..................................... 38 Remote connection

Remote connection enabled........................... 38 Remote connection status...............................38 Remote Service country code......................... 38 Remote Service custom country code........... 38 Status.............................................................. 321 Test..................................................................321 Test Remote connection..................................38

Remote Diagnostics............................................. 320 Remote Manager.................................................. 325 Remote Meter Reading........................................ 320 Remote Monitor....................................................324 Remote Service.....................................................320 Remote Service country code............................... 38 Remote Service custom country code..................38 Remote Software Upgrade.................................. 320 Removable Hard Disk

Insert............................................................... 315 Introduction.................................................... 312 Remove...........................................................314 Troubleshooting.............................................317 Use.................................................................. 312

Rename a copy job...............................................241 Replace staple cartridge

Saddle stitch unit........................................... 357

Stacker/stapler................................................357 Reprint a job..........................................................151 Restart the system..................................................34 Restore

Default workflow............................................184 RIP raster............................................................... 169 RIP resolution........................................................169 Rotation................................................. 109, 110, 111

S

Saddle Finisher-AF2............................................... 27 Booklet tray.......................................................27

Save the audit log files.........................................321 Save the datadump file.......................................... 38 Save the trace file................................................... 38 Save the zipped log file..........................................38 Scan function

Introduction.................................................... 248 Scan job

Account ID...................................................... 268 Align................................................................266 Automated settings........................................261 Black and white.............................................. 267 Color................................................................267 Destination......................................................268 Exposure.........................................................267 File type...........................................................264 Grayscale........................................................ 267 Image type......................................................264 Job name........................................................267 Job settings.................................................... 261 Margin erase...................................................267 Media size.......................................................265 Optimize scan quality.................................... 276 Original 1- or 2-sided..................................... 262 Original type...................................................263 Resolution.......................................................265 Size..................................................................264 User code........................................................268 Zoom...............................................................265

Scan jobs Access other functions.................................. 217 Combined scan job........................................ 275 Minimize......................................................... 217 Zoom...............................................................238

Scan profiles file Download........................................................255 Edit.................................................................. 255 Records........................................................... 255 Upload.............................................................255

Scan templates............................................. 236, 274 Scan to email

Address list file.......................................253, 254

Index

449 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Configuration..................................................252 Configure LDAP server.................................. 253

Scanner Clean lower sensor........................................ 360 Clean upper sensor........................................360

Schedule view Introduction.................................................... 157 Jobs pane....................................................... 158 Media toolbar................................................. 158 Output locations pane................................... 159 Required media pane.....................................158 Streaming jobs...............................................157 Zoom control..................................................159

Schedule waiting jobs..........................................147 Select

Different media for job.................................. 163 Separation enhancer

Install.................................................................63 When to use......................................................63

Separator sheets...................................................176 Serial number......................................................... 37 Service technician................................................ 374 Settings Editor

Access............................................................... 36 Access through control panel......................... 37 Accounting settings....................................... 333 Change settings................................................37 Media registration..........................................113 View settings.................................................... 37

Shifted image................................................102, 103 Troubleshooting.............................................118

Shut down the system........................................... 33 Skew...................................................................... 111 Skewed image...................................... 109, 110, 111 Skewing.................................................................110 Skewness...................................................... 109, 111 Sleep button............................................................30 Sleep mode............................................................. 30 Software error

Logging...........................................................426 Software licenses................................................... 37 Software upgrade...................................81, 119, 374 Software

Upgrade............................................................ 37 Specific media........................................................ 88 Speed.....................................................................434 Spiral cleaner

When to replace............................................. 393 Split print jobs...................................................... 153 Spots on print....................................................... 367 Stacker/stapler........................................................ 27

Replace staple cartridge of saddle stitch unit.... 357

Standard settings................................................... 95

Staple Cartridge Replace............................................................357

Staple icons...........................................................353 Stapler..................................................................... 27 Stapler waste tray...................................................27 Staples

Stacker/stapler................................................357 Stop behavior

Stop after a job...............................................129 Stop after a set............................................... 129 Stop as soon as possible...............................129

Stop the printer After a job....................................................... 129 After a set........................................................129 As soon as possible....................................... 129 Manually......................................................... 129

Subnet mask........................................................... 38 Subsets

Tab sheets...............................................242, 275 System administrator settings.............................. 37 System of measurement........................................39 System settings

Date and time................................................... 39 Media in bulk trays...........................................39 System of measurement................................. 39 Time zone......................................................... 39

System view Media section................................................... 58 Setup section....................................................41 Transaction section........................................191

System Restart...............................................................34 Shut down........................................................ 33 Turn on..............................................................32

T

TCP/IP...................................................................... 38 Templates

Copy........................................................ 236, 274 Scan.........................................................236, 274

Temporary media............................................. 54, 62 Media registration..........................................119

Test Remote connection................................ 38, 321 Test TCP/IP connection.......................................... 38 Ticket..................................................................... 155 Time zone................................................................39 To top.................................................................... 149 Toner..................................................................... 351 Toner icons........................................................... 350 Toner level

Dashboard...................................................... 351 Printer section................................................ 351 Toner icon.......................................................351

Index

450 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Trademarks............................................................. 10 Transaction printing............................................. 191

Activate........................................................... 194 Deactivate....................................................... 195 Image shift......................................................196 Media messages............................................ 205 Printer offline..................................................195 Printer online..................................................194

Transaction setup Activate........................................................... 199 Create new......................................................197 Edit.................................................................. 198 Export..............................................................200 Import..............................................................200

Trapezoid.......................................................105, 106 Trapezoid shape image................................105, 106 Trays view

Overview...........................................................56 Troubleshooting................................................... 424

Automatic media registration............... 116, 117 Long media length.........................................117 Long sheets.................................................... 117 Media registration..........................................116 Paper path registration..................................118 POC..................................................................118 Preprinted media............................................116 Shifted image................................................. 118

Truncate Job name..........................................................50

Turn on the system................................................ 32 Two-sided printing............................................... 161

U

Unlock settings in DocBox...................................304 Upgrade software.........................................429, 430

Server........................................................37, 428 USB................................................................... 37

Urgent job............................................................. 148 Urgent jobs

DocBox............................................................307 USB drive

Print job...........................................................127 Save a file to another location...................... 127

V

Verification.............................................................. 89 Verification chart.................................................... 89 Version of printer software....................................37

W

Warning time Disable.............................................................. 49

Wax mode............................................................... 77 Wax paper............................................................... 77 Where to find user documentation....................... 13 WINS 1.....................................................................38 WINS 2.....................................................................38 WINS settings......................................................... 38 Workflow profiles

Check and print................................................ 43 Function............................................................ 43 Job by job.........................................................43 Manual planning.............................................. 43 Standard........................................................... 43 Unattended.......................................................43

X

X elongation back...........................................99, 100 X elongation front.......................................... 99, 100 X elongation

Back...........................................................99, 100 Front..........................................................99, 100

X image shift back........................................ 111, 114 X image shift front........................................111, 114 X offset.......................................................... 102, 103

Z

Z image shift back........................................ 111, 114 Z image shift front........................................ 111, 114 Z offset...........................................................102, 103 Z sensor

Clean............................................................... 363 Error code....................................................... 363

Zoom behavior..................................................... 238 Zoom

Fit to page.......................................................136 Percentage......................................................136

Index

451 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

Index

452 Canon varioPRINT 135 Series

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

CANON U.S.A., INC.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

CANON CANADA INC.

6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.

703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.

CANON CHINA CO., LTD

15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China

CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.

1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632

CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD

19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the varioPRINT Canon works, you can view and download the Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operation Guide for Canon varioPRINT as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operation Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon varioPRINT. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Operation Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.